FORCINA HALL - HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT THE COLLEGE … · 2018-07-25 · forcina hall - hvac and...

FORCINA HALL - HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT

THE COLLEGE OF NEW JERSEY

2000 PENNINGTON ROAD

EWING, NJ 08628

PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 1 OF 3

DIVISION 01 THROUGH DIVISION 22

ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION

January 15, 2018

Prepared by:

DLB Associates Consulting Engineers, P.C.

265 Industrial Way West

Eatontown, NJ 07724

(DLB # 47210)

TCNJ FORCINA HALL - HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT dlb # 47210

ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION January 15, 2018



TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION DESCRIPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL CONDITIONS

010100 SUMMARY OF WORK

010250 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

011000 PROJECT PROCEDURES

013000 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

013100 QUALITY CONTROL

013200 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

013220 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

013300 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

013400 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

015240 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

018114 VOC LIMITS FOR ADHESIVES, SEALANTS, AND ARCHITECTURAL

COATINGS

018119 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

028213 ABATEMENT OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS USING NON-FRIABLE

METHODS

028214 ABATEMENT OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS IN OCCUPIED

BUILDING IN ACCORDANCE WITH NJAC 5-23:8

028433 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF PCB BULK PRODUCT

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 05 – METALS

051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, COMPOSITES

061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

070150 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING

074213 METAL WALL PANELS

075400 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

081113 HOLLOW METAL WORK



TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION DESCRIPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

099100 EXTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

221426 ROOF DRAINS



SUMMARY OF WORK 010100 - 1

SECTION 010100 - SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the specifications,

including General and Supplementary Conditions and other

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Project consists of all work noted on the drawings

and in these specifications for the Forcina Hall HVAC &

Roof Replacement project.

1. Project Location: The College of New Jersey, Ewing

New Jersey

2. Owner: The College of New Jersey, State of New

Jersey

B. Contract Documents, dated January 15, 2018, were prepared

by DLB Associates.

1.3 CONTRACTS

A. The project contract is between The College of New Jersey

and the single prime contractor performing the work

specified.

B. Definition of Extent of Contract Work: The contract

documents, specifications, project drawings,

manufacturer’s installation handbooks, TCNJ form of

agreement, and the contractors’ response to the RFP

represent the extent of the construction contract.

1.4 CONTRACTORS USE OF PREMISES

A. General: During the construction period the Contractor

shall have full use of the premises for construction

operations, including use of the site. The contractor’s

use of the premises is limited only by the Owner’s right

to perform work, retain other contractors on portions of




associated projects, or to access the building for the

occupants.

1. Contractor is to coordinate their work with the

activities for each work location.

2. Contractor shall provide for and maintain protected

pedestrian access flow through work areas during the

fulfillment of this contract. This work shall

include but is not limited to: temporary walkways,

protection of open trenches and manholes, safety

barriers, overhead protection, and signage for

pedestrian directions.

3. Unhindered and protected egress through all

emergency exit doors shall be maintained at all

times, except with written approval from the New

Jersey State Department of Community Affairs to

close such doors.

B. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to areas

required for equipment and material storage and access to

the roof area. Confine operations to areas within

contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of

the site beyond the areas immediately adjacent to the

building where the work is being performed.

1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy and use

by the public.

2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and

entrances serving the premises clear and available

to the Owner, the Owner’s employees, and emergency

vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for

parking or storage of materials unless previously

approved by the owner. Schedule deliveries to

minimize space and time requirements or storage of

materials and equipment on -site.

a. This includes traffic lanes on Metzger Dr.

During any full or partial lane closures, for

any duration, the contractor or its

subcontractor(s) shall provide proper traffic

control measures.

3. Burial of Waste Materials: Disposal of organic and

hazardous materials on-site either by burial or

burning, will not be permitted.

4. Owner will provide designated areas near the

construction site for parking for two vehicles, all




other vehicles must park at the TCNJ Carlton Avenue

parking lot and have the workers shuttled to the

site.

C. Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing

building in a weathertight condition throughout the

construction period. Repair damage caused by

construction operations. Take all precautions necessary

to protect campus, buildings, contents, components, and

systems and occupants during the construction period.

D. No Work Permitted On Site During The Following Times:

General Contractor to Schedule Accordingly.

1. TCNJ Commencement: May 17, 2018 – May 18, 2018

2. Special Olympics: June 08, 2018 – June 10, 2018

E. Contractor shall install new or cleaned filters in all

roof drains at the start of each day whenever

construction activities have the potential to generate

debris. The roof shall be thoroughly cleaned, and the

roof drain filters shall be removed at the end of each

day, whether or not rain is forecasted, to ensure the

storm drainage system is fully operable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 01010



MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 010250 - 1

SECTION 010250 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. A. Each Contractor shall prepare a schedule of values in

coordination with the preparation of progress schedule.

Correlate line items with other administrative schedules and

forms required for the work, including progress schedule,

payment request form, listing of subcontractors, schedule of

allowances if any, schedule of alternates if any, listing of

products and principal suppliers and fabricators, and

schedule of submittals. Break down principal subcontract

amounts into multiple line items for each entity of work.

Round off to nearest whole dollar, but with total equal to

Contract Sum. Submit 4 copies of schedule of values to the

Owner and Architect for review and approval.

B. Upon Owner/Architect approval, Owner will return the

Schedule of Values to the Contractor for the Contractor to

submit to the bonding company for their acceptance.

Payments will not be made to the Contractor until the

bonding company has provided a written acceptance to the

Owner.

C. The schedule of values shall be tabulated into subcontracts

and trades with the Quantity, Labor, Material, and Total

Cost indicated. The Schedule of Values shall include such

items as bonds, insurance, allowances and alternates,

punchlist/close out documents and shall enclose copies of

invoices and/or cancelled checks from bonding and insurance

agents.

D. Schedule of values shall be submitted on AIA Form G703 or

similar form approved by the Architect and Owner.

E. Each Contractor's monthly application for payment shall be

in the same schedule form, reflecting the same items from

above. Unit costs shall be realistic for their part of the

Work.




1.2 CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. When a change in the Work includes a category or categories

of Work both added to and deducted from the Contract, the

total quantities of added Work and of deleted Work shall be

determined separately for each category and the appropriate

unit price or net cost of the Work shall be applied to the

difference between the two total quantities.

B. Unit prices shall be inclusive of all costs and shall be

applied to units of measure as defined in the Specifications

for each category of Work.

C. For all extra Work performed by the Contractor, the gross

cost to the Owner shall include the net cost of the Work to

the Contractor plus an allowance for overhead and profit not

to exceed 15% of the net cost.

D. For all extra Work performed by a Subcontractor, the gross

cost to the Owner shall include the net cost of the Work to

the Subcontractor plus an allowance for overhead and profit

not to exceed 15% of the net cost, plus the Prime

Contractor's overhead and profit not to exceed 5% of the

Subcontractor's cost.

E. Net cost of extra Work shall be the actual or pro-rated cost

of:

1. Labor, including foreman, at the prevailing rate of

wages, contributions and taxes.

2. Materials entering permanently into the Work, including

delivery to the site.

3. The ownership or rental cost of construction equipment

and expendable tools, pro-rated for the time necessary

for the Work.

4. Power and consumable supplies for the operation of

power equipment, pro-rated for the time necessary for

the Work.

5. Insurance and Bonds.

F. Gross costs shall be net costs plus the mark up allowances

described above, such allowances being inclusive, of all

cost of superintendence, supervision, engineering, overhead,

profit, administrative and site office expenses and all

other general expenses.




1.3 1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Except as otherwise indicated, sequence of progress payments

for the Contractor shall be regular, and each shall be

consistent with previous applications and payments. It is

recognized that certain applications involve extra

requirements, including initial applications, applications

at times of substantial completion, and final payment

applications.

B. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and G703

Continuation Sheets; available from Publications Dis-

tribution Div., The American Institute of Architects, 1735

New York Ave., N.W., Washington, D.C. 20006 (also available

at most local AIA chapter offices).

C. Except as otherwise indicated, complete every entry provided

on the form, including notarization and execution by

authorized persons. Incomplete applications will be

returned by Architect and Owner without action. Entries

shall match current data of schedule of values, progress

schedules and reports. Listing shall include amounts of

fully executed change orders issued prior to first day of

the period of construction covered by application.

Applications for payment shall include weekly payroll

report. Contractor shall furnish to the Owner certified

payroll reports for each payroll period with pay request,

indicating name craft, social security number and actual

hourly rate of wages paid to each workman employed on the

project. A certified payroll record is defined as "a

payroll record which is attested to by the employer, or

corporate officer of such company, or an authorized agent of

the employer." A payment request will not be paid until the

Owner receives the certified payrolls.

D. Submit one "pencil" copy of each proposed payment

application to the architect and owner, for review, not less

than seven days prior to formal submissions of application.

E. Submit 4 executed copies of each payment application.

Transmit with a transmittal form listing attachments, and

recording appropriate information related to application.

F. Breakdown may include a line item for General Conditions.

General Conditions shall include the cost of general

supervision, trailers, temporary utilities and other general

expenses directly related to the project and not considered




overhead. The general conditions item shall be billed on

monthly progress payments on a percentage of work completed.

1.4 INITIAL PAYMENT APPLICATION

A. The principal administrative actions and submittals which

shall precede or coincide with submittal of the Contractor's

first payment application can be summarized as follows, but

not necessarily by way of limitation.

1. Listing of subcontractors and principal suppliers and

fabricators.

2. Schedule of values.

3. Schedule of principal products.

4. Schedule of submittals (preliminary if not final).

5. Copies of acquired building permits and similar

authorizations and licenses from governing authorities

for current performance of the work.

6. Data needed by Owner to secure related insurance

coverages.

7. Performance and Payment Bond.

8. Insurance Certificates.

1.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. Based upon application for payments submitted to the

Architect and the Owner, by the Contractor, on or about the

25th day of each month for the period ending the last day of

the previous second month, and Certificate of Payment issued

by the Architect and the Owner, the Owner will make progress

payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as

follows:

1. On or after the 20th day of each month, the Contractor

shall submit to the Architect and Owner a "pencil copy"

indicating the previous payment and the proposed

amounts for each line item for the current period.

After review and approval or changes, the Contractor

shall prepare the final billing for presentation to the

Architect and Owner.

2. a. Whenever any contract, the total price of which

exceeds $100,000, entered into by a State college, for

the construction, reconstruction, alteration or repair




of any building, structure, facility or other

improvement to real property, requires the withholding

of payment of a percentage of the amount of the

contract, the contractor may agree to the withholding

of payments in the manner prescribed in the contract,

or may deposit with the State college registered book

bonds, entry municipal bonds, State bonds or other

appropriate bonds of the State of New Jersey, or

negotiable bearer bonds or notes of any political

subdivision of the State, the value of which is equal

to the amount necessary to satisfy the amount that

otherwise would be withheld pursuant to the terms of

the contract. The nature and amount of the bonds or

notes to be deposited shall be subject to approval by

the State college. For purposes of this section,

"value" shall mean par value or current market value,

whichever is lower.

If the contractor agrees to the withholding of

payments, the amount withheld shall be deposited, with

a banking institution or savings and loan association

insured by an agency of the Federal government, in an

account bearing interest at the rate currently paid by

such institutions or associations on time or savings

deposits. The amount withheld, or the bonds or notes

deposited, and any interest accruing on such bonds or

notes, shall be returned to the contractor upon

fulfillment of the terms of the contract relating to

such withholding. Any interest accruing on cash

payments withheld shall be credited to the State

college.

b. Any contract, the total price of which exceeds

$100,000, entered into by a State college involving

the construction, reconstruction, alteration, repair

or maintenance of any building, structure, facility or

other improvement to real property, shall provide for

partial payments to be made at least once each month

as the work progresses, unless the contractor shall

agree to deposit bonds with the State college pursuant

to section 1.

c.1. With respect to any contract entered into by a

State college pursuant to section 2 for which the

contractor shall agree to the withholding of payments

pursuant to section 1, 2% of the amount due on each

partial payment shall be withheld by the State college

pending completion of the contract.




c.2. Upon acceptance of the work performed pursuant to

the contract for which the contractor has agreed to

the withholding of payments pursuant to subsection a.

of this section, all amounts being withheld by the

State college shall be released and paid in full to

the contractor within 45 days of the final acceptance

date agreed upon by the contractor and the State

college, without further withholding of any amounts

for any purpose whatsoever, provided that the contract

has been completed as indicated. If the State college

requires maintenance security after acceptance of the

work performed pursuant to the contract, such security

shall be obtained in the form of a maintenance bond.

The maintenance bond shall be no longer than two years

and shall be no more than 100% of the project costs.

d. This act shall take effect immediately. This bill

supplements the “State College Contracts Law,”

P.L.1986, c.43 (C.18A:64-52 et seq.), and applies to

any State college contract for over $100,000 which

involves the construction, reconstruction, alteration

or repair of any building, structure, facility or

other improvement to real property. Under the

provisions of this bill, whenever a contract of this

type requires the withholding of payment of a

percentage of the amount of the contract, the

contractor would have the choice of either agreeing to

a retainage deduction from each monthly progress

payment, or the contractor could choose to deposit

bonds in the amount necessary to satisfy the amount

that otherwise would be withheld under the contract.

If a contractor chooses a retainage deduction from

each monthly payment, then the retainage would be

limited to 2% of the amount due on each partial

payment. Upon acceptance of the work performed

pursuant to the contract for which the contractor has

agreed to a retainage deduction, all amounts being

withheld by the State college must be paid in full to

the contractor within 45 days of the final acceptance

date agreed upon by the contractor and the State

college. The bill provides that if the State college

requires maintenance security after acceptance of the

work performed under the contract, the security must

be obtained in the form of a maintenance bond, which

is required to be no longer than two years and no

more than 100% of the project costs. The provisions

of this bill are similar to provisions in the “Local




Public Contracts Law,” P.L.1971, c.198 (C.40A:11-1 et

seq.) and the “Public School Contracts Law,” P.L.1977,

c.114 (C.18A:18A-1 47 et seq.).

3. Upon substantial completion, the retainage shall, upon

the Architect/Owner’s approval, remain at 2% of the

value of work completed. Final release of retained

monies will occur only upon the total completion of all

punch list and closeout documentation to the

satisfaction of the Architect and Owner.

4. For each day's delay in the Contractor's submission of

an application for payment acceptable to the Architect

and Owner, the Owner may delay one day in making his

progress payment.

5. Owner shall make payments within 30 days of receipt of said

monthly pay requisition.

1.6 APPLICATION AT TIME OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Following issuance of certificate of substantial completion

on each Contractor's work, and also in part as applicable to

prior certificates on portions of completed work as

designated, a "special" payment application may be prepared

and submitted by Contractor. The principal administrative

actions and submittals which shall precede or coincide with

such special applications can be summarized as follows, but

not necessarily by way of limitation:

1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals or cer-

tifications by governing authorities and franchised

services, assuring Owner's full access and use of

completed work.

2. Warranties, guarantees, maintenance agreements and

similar provisions of Contract Documents.

3. Test/adjust/balance records, maintenance instructions,

meter readings, start up performance reports, and

similar change over information germane to Owner's

occupancy, use, operation and maintenance of completed

work.

4. Final cleaning of the work.

5. Application for reduction (if any) of retainage, with

consent of surety.

6. Advice to Owner on coordination of shifting insurance

coverages, including proof of extended coverage as

required.




7. Listing of Contractor's incomplete work, recognized as

exceptions to certificate of substantial completion.

1.7 FINAL PAYMENT APPLICATION

A. The administrative actions and submittals which shall

precede or coincide with submittal of the Contractor's final

payment application can be summarized as follows, but not

necessarily by way of limitation.

1. Completion of project closeout requirements.

2. Completion of items specified for completion beyond

time of substantial completion, regardless of whether

special payment application was previously made.

3. Assurance, satisfactory to Owner and Owner, that

unsettled claims will be settled and that work not

actually completed and accepted will be completed

without undue delay.

4. Transmittal of required project construction records to

Owner via the Owner.

5. Proof, satisfactory to Owner and Owner, that taxes,

fees and similar obligations of Contractor have been

paid.

6. Removal of temporary facilities, services, surplus

materials, rubbish and similar elements.

7. Notarized consent of surety for final payment.

1.8 WAIVER OF LIENS

A. Each Contractor, for himself, and for all Subcontractors and

material men, agrees that no mechanic's lien or other claim

shall be filed or maintained by the Contractor or by any

Subcontractor, materialmen, laborer or any other person

whatsoever for, or on account of any work performed or

materials furnished under this Contract. This agreement

shall be an independent contract, and the Contractor shall

execute and deliver a separate Waiver of Liens in form and

substance satisfactory to the Architect and Owner

contemporaneously with the execution of the Owner-Contractor

Agreement and before any work is begun at the site.

B. In every subcontract entered into by each Contractor after

execution of this Contract or in connection herewith, the

Contractor shall incorporate a provision, similar to the




foregoing paragraph, to the effect that neither the

Subcontractor nor any party acting through or under him

shall file or maintain any mechanic's lien or other claim

against the Architect or Owner in connection with the Work.




PROJECT PROCEDURES 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Schedule:

1. Contractor shall provide a master schedule showing

sequencing of work utilizing the CPM method. The

Contractor shall supply a schedule with all

subcontractor activities, relationships, and durations,

utilizing the CPM method via SureTrak/Primavera,

Version 3.0, or Microsoft scheduling software to the

Owner on a working version CD-ROM and coordinate their

schedule with the Owner.

2. The Contractor is required to update at the end of each

month the CPM Schedule based on the percentage

completed for each activity on the approved schedule

(in concert with the submission of the percentage

completed in the monthly proposed schedule of values).

3. The contractor in their bid includes a cost of $500.00

per month for this schedule submission, for the

duration of construction (per the milestone schedule in

the bidding documents). This only applies to projects

in excess of 2 million dollars in base price. The

contractor’s schedule of values shall include this

cost, and can only be billed for upon TCNJ’s successful

receipt of said schedule. Should any schedule not be

received at the end of any month during construction,

TCNJ will issue a deduct change order in the amount of

$500.00 to the contractor.

B. Each Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to

ensure the safety of all structural elements during all

phases of all work. No materials, cranes, trucks or any

other construction loads shall be placed on any part of the

structure, ground, pavement, concrete, etc. until the

Contractor has determined the adequacy of that structure to

carry the intended load without damage or overstress.

C. Entrance into, or other use of the college buildings will

not be permitted except as may be necessary for the




execution of the Work, and shall be subject to the

restrictions and instructions of the Owner.

D. Routes of ingress and egress to areas where work is being

performed shall be subject to the restrictions and

instructions of the Owner.

E. Materials shall be moved through the campus buildings using

rubber tired vehicles which shall be properly controlled at

all times to avoid damage to existing wall, floor or

ceiling surfaces.

F. Water damage cannot be tolerated and it is incumbent upon

Contractors to take any steps necessary to keep the

existing premises dry at all times.

G. Any damage to the campus buildings from heavy equipment,

striking the Building or any other damage to any part of

the premises shall be repaired at the expense of the

Contractors.

H. All welding and cutting shall be performed by qualified and

certified welders. Certificates shall be on file with the

Contractor prior to commencement of any welding. All hot

work operations shall use the contractor’s, or the

subcontractor’s, hot work permit, that adheres to local,

state, and federal regulations and codes.

I. No work shall start before 8:30am unless agreed to in

advance with the College.

J. All projects that require access to dormitories and

apartments by contractor personnel require that each person

have a state police background check completed and the

contractor is to provide a list of all potential personnel

to work at the site, and provide a copy of the back ground

checks to the TCNJ project manager prior to start of the

work on the project. Should a person not have a back ground

check as required herewith (such as a delivery person),

this unchecked person must be accompanied by a

representative of the contractor who has been checked.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. A. Contractors shall perform the work on or about the

premises in a careful manner with full consideration to

fire protection as required by OSHA, the National Fire

Protection Association Standards, National Board of Fire

Underwriters and State and Local Departments having

jurisdiction. Fire resistant materials shall be used for

temporary enclosures.

B. Chemical extinguishers approved by the Owner shall be

provided by the General Contractor during the progress of

the work where and as required by the Owner, the Local Fire

Marshal and the National Board of Fire Underwriters.

1. The contractor shall not expect to use TCNJ fire

extinguishers.

2. All fire extinguishers provided by the contractor or

any subcontractors, shall be maintained and inspected

as required by local, state, and federal regulations

and codes.”

C. The Contractor shall maintain an active program of fire

prevention to keep workmen fire conscious during the entire

life of the Contract. Designate one member of the

organization to execute and coordinate fire control

measures of his own organization and that of all

subcontractors under his jurisdiction.

D. All sub-contractors shall cooperate with the Contractor in

carrying out the above program.

E. Storage of flammable materials will not be permitted in the

Building unless written permission is obtained from the

Owner.

1. Storage of all such materials shall be the Contractors'

responsibility and as required by local, state, and

federal regulations and codes.




F. On-site open burning of rubbish, garbage, trade waste,

leaves or plant life is prohibited.

G. Safety Program: The Contractor shall institute a safety

program in accordance with OSHA and any local, state, or

federal regulations and codes.

1. The contractor shall name a safety officer to monitor

this program, have authority to halt and correct unsafe

conditions, and shall submit a safety report at job

meetings.

2. Fall Protection that meets OSHA requirements shall be

utilized and maintained throughout the project, as

required to be in compliance.

3. All workers shall have the authority to halt unsafe

conditions, not just the “Safety Officer.

H. Stockpiling: Stockpiling of materials on site will be

allowed (but limited due to the limited space on this

site). Such materials shall not impair or impede the

functioning of the facility. Materials stored on site shall

be secured to prevent loss from theft, damage, vandalism or

fire. By stockpiling materials on site, the contractor

assumes full responsibility for said materials, and shall

protect them to the fullest extent possible. Specific

locations for stockpiling materials shall be coordinated

with the Architect, Owner and Owner.

I. Safety Barriers: The Contractor shall erect safety

barriers to deter and prohibit unauthorized access to the

construction site; such barriers may take the form of

fences and shall be clearly marked with signage prohibiting

unauthorized access. The Contractor shall be responsible

for safety barriers within the building. The contractor

shall be liable for damages to persons or property due to

the construction process if adequate safety measures are

not undertaken. The Owner and Architect shall review

safety precautions for their adequacy but shall not be held

liable for Contractors failure to maintain or provide

adequate protection.

1. The contractor shall prevent intrusion of dust, debris,

sound, odor, equipment, etc. into the occupied spaces.

2. All entrances to the work area shall have signage

prohibiting unauthorized access and identifying the




minimum personal protective equipment required to

enter.

J. Sequencing: The Contractor will work with the Sub-

Contractors to sequence the work during the submission of

monthly project schedules. Contractors shall endeavor to

coordinate their work efforts with the Owner's

requirements. Interruptions of utility services shall be

coordinated with the Architect, Owner and Owner, but in no

instance shall last longer than 2 hours.

K. Limited staging and onsite parking will be provided by

General Contractor. The Contractor will coordinate parking

areas with all the subcontractors and TCNJ.

1. Parking will be available at Carlton Avenue.

Contractor will provide shuttle service to the site.

2. Contractor will be permitted to have one vehicle on

site.

L. Site Utilities: Electric power and water are available on

site. Toilet facilities will be made available by the

Contractor. These facilities shall remain clean by the

Contractors throughout the course of the project. The

Contractors shall repair and/or replace any damaged

fixtures, partitions, etc. The Electrical Sub-Contractor

shall tie in a temporary power panel (or panels as

required) for all trades to use during construction.

Interruption of building services shall not occur without

prior consent and coordination by the Owner and Owner.

1. The contractor shall provide and maintain portable

toilets for all construction personnel.

M. Construction Lighting: The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall

run sufficient strings and fixtures to maintain a 50 foot-

candle/sq. ft. intensity of light throughout the project

areas.

N. Dumpster Location and Cleanup: The Engineer and Owner

shall coordinate the dumpster location with the

Contractors. The Contractor shall be responsible for

obtaining, maintaining, and disposing of dumpsters, and

shall maintain clean work areas throughout the course of

the project.




O. Ceiling Tile Replacement After Work: In occupied areas,

ceiling tiles must be reset after that portion of work has

finished or at the end of the day, whichever is sooner.

3.2 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Progress Meetings shall be held bi-weekly at the job site

at a regular time and day mutually agreed upon. The

frequency may be changed by the Architect or Owner to

reflect current conditions. The Contractors, those of

his/their subcontractors concerned with current progress or

with scheduling of future progress, the Architect, the

Owner, and the Owner shall each be represented at these job

meetings by persons familiar with the details of the work

and authorized to conclude matters relative to work

progress, establishment of progress schedules, etc., as may

be necessary to expedite completion of the work.

B. The Contractors and his/their subcontractors attending

these meetings shall present complete and definite reports

as to the status of their respective work, conditions of

product and equipment manufacturer, labor availability,

productivity and cooperation, shipping data, time of

completion, sequence of the work, safety program, and any

other information bearing upon the execution of the

Contract or subcontract. For the Owner's convenience the

Owner will chair the meetings.

3.3 MONTHLY REPORTS

A. The Contractor is to provide TCNJ a brief monthly status

report on the last working day of each month dividing the

status of the project into the following categories (report

must be complete in all respects, piece meal submissions

will not be accepted):

1. Project overview

2. Financial status

3. Updated project schedule

4. Change order request log

5. Submittal log

6. RFI log

7. Owner/Architect issues that need immediate resolution




8. Order/delivery issues

B. The Contractor is to provide TCNJ with this monthly report,

and include in their bid a cost of $500.00 per month for

all projects in excess of 2 million dollars base bid price

for the duration of the construction period as noted in the

bidding milestone schedule. This total cost will be listed

in the contractor’s schedule of values and can be billed

for on a monthly basis only if said report is received in

whole as noted above. Should TCNJ not receive said complete

report a deduct change order will be issued to the

contractor for $500.00 for that month.




SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 013000-1

SECTION 013000 – SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PROGRESS SCHEDULE / COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor's schedule, shall coordinate with all trades

to produce a coordinated CPM via Suretrak/Primavera version

3.0 or a Microsoft scheduling program schedule indicating

the start and completion dates for each portion of the work

as defined by the schedule of values, with the total time as

defined by the contract time and milestone dates as set

forth in these specifications. The Contractor’s CPM

schedule shall be submitted in electronic format (Suretrak

3.0 or a Microsoft Scheduling program) to and reviewed by

the Owner and Engineer prior to first application for

payment. Any revisions or additional information requested

by the Owner or Engineer shall be provided. (No payment

shall be made to any Contractor not providing a schedule

that reflects their entire work).

1. Also refer to Section 011000 – Project Procedures.

B. The Contractor shall revise the progress schedule on a

monthly basis as the work progresses reflecting therein any

delays, including those not within the Contractor's control,

or accelerations in the progress of the work. The progress

schedule, as revised for any weekly period, shall be

discussed at the bi-weekly job meetings with the, Owner, the

Engineer, and the Contractor and the major trades in order

to insure that the percentage of actual completion of any

portion of the work as called for in the progress schedule

for that bi-weekly period is attained. Monthly updates to

the progress schedule shall be made prior to application for

payment.

C. Should any delay occur in the progress of the work or any

portion thereof, the Contractor shall be required to

implement all necessary measures to accelerate the

construction, to meet the percentages of completion dictated

by the progress schedule on the applicable dates, without

additional cost to the Owner.




1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

A. Shop drawings, product data and samples will not be

processed by the Owner and/or Engineer until the list of

subcontractors, material suppliers and fabricators is

submitted as required under Paragraph 3.12 of the General

Conditions.

1. The successful Contractor shall submit their list of

proposed substitutions with in 10 working days of the

Contract Award.

2. The Engineer shall be compensated on an hourly basis

for review of all shop drawings or samples that do not

meet the requirements of the contract documents after

two submissions. The compensation shall be deducted

from the contractors contract via a deduct change

order, or other means that both parties agree to.

B. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with

performance of the work so that work will not be delayed by

submittals. Allow two weeks for review/approval by the

Engineer for the approval process. Allow additional time if

processing must be delayed to permit coordination with

subsequent submittals with others.

C. Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify

Project, date, Contractor, subcontractor, submittal name,

Specification section, drawing reference, and similar

information to distinguish it from other submittals. Show

Contractor's executed review and approval marking and

provide space (5" x 7") for Engineer's Action marking and

space for Owner's review marking. Package each submittal

appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals

received, which are lacking the above information, will be

returned without action. Submittals, which are received from

sources other than through Contractor’s office, will be

returned without action.

D. Each submission shall be complete, with all options clearly

marked and with all components required for the assembly

fully described and detailed. Submissions missing important

information will be returned unchecked.

E. Transmittal Form: Submittals shall be accompanied by a

transmittal form. Provide Contractor's certification on

form, ready for execution, stating that information

submitted complies with requirements of contract documents.




1. Transmit all submittals and shop drawings to the

Engineer with a copy of the transmittal to the Owner.

F. Except as otherwise indicated in individual work sections,

comply with requirements specified herein for each indicated

category of submittal. Provide and process intermediate

submittals, where required between initial and final,

similar to initial submittals.

G. Maintain returned final set of samples at project site, in

suitable condition and available for quality control

comparisons by Engineer, and by Owner.

H. Do not proceed with installation of materials, products or

systems until final copy of applicable shop drawings,

product data and samples are in possession of Installer.

I. Provide newly prepared shop drawings, on reproducible

sheets, with graphic information at accurate scale, with

company name of preparer indicated. Show dimensions and

note which are based on field measurement. Identify

materials and products in the work shown. Indicate

compliance with standards, and special coordination

requirements. Do not allow shop drawing copies without

appropriate final Action markings by Engineer to be used in

connection with the work.

1. Initial and Intermediate Submittals: One correctable

translucent reproducible print and 5 blue line or black

line prints; reproducible will be returned.

2. Final Submittal: 6 prints, plus 3 additional prints

where required for maintenance manuals; 4 will be

retained and remainder will be returned, one of which

shall be marked up and maintained by Contractor as

"Record Document".

3. Electronic submittals are acceptable in AutoCAD format

only. Contractor shall be responsible for printing and

distribution of multiple copies as required.

J. Collect required product data into one submittal for each

unit of work or system; and mark each copy to show which

choices and options are applicable to the project. Include

manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for

application and use, compliance with standards, application

of labels and seals, notation of field measurements that

have been checked, and special coordination requirements.




Maintain one set of product data for each submittal at

project site, available for reference by Engineer and

others.

K. Submittals will be accepted from the Contractor only.

Submittals received from other entities will be returned

without review or action.

1. Submittals received without a transmittal form will be

returned without review or action.

2. Transmittal form: Use a form matching the sample form

attached to this section. Include the following:

a. List of deviations.

b. The Contractor's certification signature.

3. Fill out a separate transmittal form for each

submittal; also include the following:

a. Other relevant information.

b. Request for additional information.

L. Do not submit product data, or allow its use on the project,

until compliance with requirements of Contract Documents has

been confirmed by Contractor. Submittal is for information

and record unless otherwise indicated. Initial submittal is

final submittal unless returned promptly by Engineer marked

with an Action that indicates and observed noncompliance.

Submit 6 copies, plus 3 additional copies, which will be

returned, where required for maintenance manuals.

1. Electronic submittals are acceptable in 8 ½” x 11”

format only.

M. Provide three (3) samples identical with final condition of

proposed materials or products for the work. Include range

samples, not less than 3 units, where unavoidable variations

between units of each set. Provide full set of optional

samples where Engineer's selection is required. Prepare

samples to match Engineer's sample where so indicated.

Include information with sample to show generic description,

source or products name and manufacturer, limitations, and

compliance with standards. Samples are submitted for review

and confirmation of color, pattern, texture and kind by

Engineer. Engineer will not test samples, except as

otherwise indicated, for compliance with other requirements,

which are therefore the exclusive responsibility of the

Contractor.




N. Upon receipt of a signed copy of the Engineer’s Waiver form,

electronic copies of CAD drawings of the Contract Documents

will be provided by the Engineer for Contractor's use in

preparing submittals. Copy of Waiver form is attached.

O. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product

selection include the following:

1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or

subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product

and manufacturer, provide the named product or an

equivalent.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or

subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or "Source" name

single manufacturers or sources, provide a product of

the manufacturer or source that complies with

requirements, or an equivalent.

3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or

subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of

names of both products and manufacturers, provide one

of the products listed that complies with requirements,

or an equivalent. Comply with provisions of "Product

Options and Substitutions," Section 1.4 of Division

1300 of these specifications when submitting an

equivalent product.

4. Manufacturers: Where specification paragraphs or

subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" introduce a list

of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of

the manufacturers listed, or an equivalent, that

complies with requirements. Comply with provisions of

"Product Options and Substitutions," Section 1.4 of

Division 1300 of these specifications when submitting

an equivalent product.

5. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs or

subparagraphs refer to "Product Options and

Substitutions," indicate that size, profiles, and

dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a

specific product or system; provide the specific

product or system or an equivalent product or system by

another manufacturer. Comply with provisions of

"Product Options and Substitutions," Section 1.4 of

Division 1300 of these specifications when submitting

an equivalent product.




6. Basis of Design Products: Where Specification

paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis-of-Design

Products" introduce or refer to a list of

manufacturers' names, provide either the specified

product or an equivalent. Drawings and Specifications

indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions and other

characteristics that are based on the product names.

Comply with the provisions of "Product Options and

Substitutions," Section 1.4 of Division 1300 of these

specifications when submitting an equivalent product.

1.3 MISCELLANEOUS SUBMITTALS

A. Miscellaneous submittals related directly to the work

include warranties, maintenance agreements, workmanship

bonds, survey data and reports, physical work records,

quality testing and certifying reports, copies of industry

standards, record drawings, field measurement data,

operating and maintenance materials, overrun stock, and

similar information, devices and materials applicable to the

work and not processed as shop drawings, product data or

samples.

B. Refer to sections for specific general requirements on

warranties, product/workmanship bonds, and maintenance

agreements. In addition to copies desired for Contractor's

use, furnish 2 executed copies, except furnish 3 additional

copies where required for maintenance manuals.

C. For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional

settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments,

and similar documents, correspondence and records

established in conjunction with compliance with standards

and regulations bearing upon performance of the work.

1.4 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. A. DEFINITIONS

1. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the

Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from

previously purchased stock. The term "product"

includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system,"

and terms of similar intent.




a. Named Products: Items identified by

manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation, shown or listed

in manufacturer's published product literature,

that is current as of date of the Contract

Documents.

b. New Products: Items that have not previously been

incorporated into another project or facility,

except that products consisting of recycled-

content materials are allowed, unless explicitly

stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled

from other projects are not considered new

products.

c. Equivalent Product: Product that is demonstrated

and approved through submittal process, or where

indicated as a product substitution, to have the

indicated qualities related to type, function,

dimension, in-service performance, physical

properties, appearance, and other characteristics

that equal or exceed those of specified product.

2. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials,

equipment, and methods of construction from those

required by the Contract Documents and proposed by

Contractor.

3. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a

specific manufacturer's product is named and

accompanied by the words "basis of design," including

make or model number or other designation, to establish

the significant qualities related to type, function,

dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,

appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of

evaluating comparable products of other named

manufacturers.

4. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty

published by individual manufacturer for a particular

product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to

Owner.

5. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or

incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to

extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty

or to provide more rights for Owner.




B. General Requirements:

1. The requirements for substitutions do not apply to

specified Contractor options on products and

construction methods. Revisions to Contract Documents,

where requested by Owner or Engineer are changes, not

substitutions. Contractor's determination of and

compliance with governing regulations and orders issued

by governing authorities do not constitute

substitutions and do not constitute a basis for change

orders. Otherwise, Contractor's requests for changes in

products, materials, and methods of construction

required by Contract Documents are considered requests

for substitutions, and are subject to requirements

hereto.

2. To the greatest extent possible, provide products,

materials and equipment of a singular generic kind and

from a single source.

3. Where more than one choice is available as options for

Contractor's selection of a product or material, select

an option that is compatible with other products and

materials already selected. Total compatibility among

options is not assured by limitations within Contract

Documents, but shall be provided by Contractor.

Compatibility is a basic general requirement of

product/material selections.

4. Any and all contractor substitutions that require

additional work by other trades not specifically called

for in the documents shall be paid for by the

contractor requesting the substitution if any other

trade increase is required.

5. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial

advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other

considerations, after deducting additional

responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional

responsibilities may include compensation to Engineer

for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of

other construction by Owner, and similar

considerations.

C. Submittals: Submit 6 copies, utilizing Substitution Request

Form, CSI Form 13.1.A, fully identified for product or

method being requested for substitution, including related

specification section and drawing numbers, and fully

documented to show compliance with requirements for




substitutions. Include product data/drawings, description

of methods, samples where applicable, Contractor's details

comparison of significant qualities between specified item

and proposed substitution, statement of effect on

construction time and coordination with other affected work

and contractors, cost information or proposal, warranty

information, compatibility with other work, approval of all

authorities having jurisdiction, and Contractor's statement

to the effect that proposed substitution will result in

overall work equal to or better than work originally

indicated.

D. Contractor's options for selecting products are limited by

Contract Documents requirements, and governing regulations.

Required procedures include, but are not necessarily limited

to, the following for various indicated methods or

specifying:

1. Single product/manufacturer name; provide product

indicated or equivalent, except advise Engineer before

proceeding, where known that named product is not a

feasible or acceptable selection.

2. Two or more product/manufacturer names; provide one of

the named products or equivalent, at Contractor's

option; but excluding products which do not comply with

requirements. Advise Engineer before proceeding.

3. Equivalent; where named products in Specifications text

are accompanied by the term "or equivalent", or other

language of similar effect, comply with those Contract

Documents provisions concerning substitutions for

obtaining Engineer's approval of equivalent product.

4. Named, except as otherwise indicated, is defined to

mean manufacturer's name for product, as recorded in

published product literature, of latest issue as of

date of Contract Documents. Refer requests to use

products of a later or earlier model to Engineer for

acceptance before proceeding.

5. Where compliance with an imposed standard, code or

regulation is required, selection from among products

that comply with requirements including those

standards, codes and regulations, is Contractor's

option.

6. Provide products which comply with specific

performances indicated, and which are recommended by




manufacturer, in published product literature or by

individual certification, for application indicated.

Overall performance of a product is implied where

product is specified for specific performance.

7. Provide products that have been produced in accordance

with prescriptive requirements, using specified

ingredients and components, and complying with

specified requirements for mixing, fabricating, curing,

finishing, testing and similar operations in

manufacturing process.

8. Where matching of an established sample is required,

final judgment of whether a product proposed by

Contractor matches sample satisfactorily is Engineer's

judgment. Where no product within specified cost

category is available, which matches sample

satisfactorily and complies with requirements, comply

with Contract Document provisions concerning

substitutions for selection of a matching product

outside established cost category or not complying with

requirements.

9. Where specified product requirements include "...as

selected from manufacturer's full range of colors,

patterns, textures..." or words of similar effect, the

selection of manufacturer and basic product data is to

comply with requirements of the Contract, and selection

shall be from the full range of products within the

requirements. Where specified product requirements

include "... as the industry...", or words to that

effect, selection of product complying with

requirements, is Engineer's selection, including

designation of manufacturer, where necessary to obtain

desired color, pattern or texture.

E. Substitutions may be permitted by the Engineer, if, in his

opinion, the requirements of the proposed substitution

comply with the requirements specified for the material,

article or piece of equipment; however, the Engineer is not

required to permit substitution pursuant to the case of

Whitten Corporation vs. Paddock, Incorporated, United States

District Court, Massachusetts, April 12, 1974, affirmed by

the Federal First Circuit Court, December 14, 1974.

F. After award of contract, the Contractor may submit

substitutes to the Engineer for review, fully documented and




certified, and accompanied by a proposal for a reduction in

the Contract Sum.

G. Contractor's request for substitution will be received and

considered when extensive revisions to Contract Documents

are not required and changes are in keeping with general

intent of Contract Documents; when timely, fully documented

and properly submitted; and when one or more of following

conditions is satisfied, all as judged by Engineer.

Otherwise, requests will be returned without action except

to record noncompliance with these requirements.

1. Where request is directly related to an "equivalent"

clause or other language of same effect in Contract

Documents.

2. Where required product, material or method cannot be

provided within Contract Time, but not as a result of

Contractor's failure to pursue the work promptly or

coordinate various activities properly.

3. Where required product, material or method cannot be

provided in a manner which is compatible with other

materials of the work, or cannot be properly

coordinated therewith, or cannot be warranted

(guaranteed) as required, or cannot be used without

adversely affecting Owner's insurance coverage on

completed work, or will encounter other substantial

noncompliances which are not possible to otherwise

overcome except by making requested substitution, which

Contractor thereby certifies to overcome such

incompatibility, uncoordination, nonwarranty,

noninsurability or other noncompliance as claimed.

4. Where substantial advantage is offered Owner, in terms

of cost, time or other valuable considerations, after

deducting offsetting responsibilities Owner may be

required to bear, including additional compensation to

Engineer for redesign and evaluation services,

increased cost of other work by Owner or separate

Contractors, and similar considerations.

H. Contractor's submittal of, and Engineer's acceptance of,

shop drawings, product data or samples which indicate work

not complying with requirements of Contract Documents, does

not constitute an acceptable and valid request for, nor

approval of, a substitution.




I. QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given

option of selecting between two or more products for

use on Project, product selected shall be compatible

with products previously selected, even if previously

selected products were also options.

2. Each contractor is responsible for providing products

and construction methods compatible with products and

construction methods of other contractors.

3. If a dispute arises between contractors over

concurrently selectable but incompatible products,

Engineer will determine which products shall be used.

J. EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS

1. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name,

Contractor must submit the following, in addition to

other required submittals, to obtain approval of an

unnamed product proposed as an equivalent:

a. Evidence that the proposed product does not

require extensive revisions to the Contract

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract

Documents and will produce the indicated results,

and that it is compatible with other portions of

the Work.

b. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of

proposed product with those named in the

specifications. Significant qualities include

attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, and specific features

and requirements indicated.

c. Evidence that proposed product provides specified

warranty.

d. List of similar installations for completed

projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of Engineers and owners, if

requested.

e. Samples, if requested.




1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AND EQUIPMENT

WARRANTIES

A. The Contractor shall orient and instruct the responsible

maintenance personnel designated by the Owner in the

Operation of all equipment and shall provide the maintenance

personnel with pertinent literature and operational manuals

for all equipment. Date and time of demonstrations shall be

mutually agreed upon with the Owner. Provide qualified

personnel for as long as necessary to fully orient and

instruct the Owner. Contractor shall videotape instruction

session and provide owner with completed video.

B. The manuals shall be submitted in (quadruplicate) 3-ring

loose-leaf type binders to the Engineer for approval with

all additional information that the Engineer may request and

considers necessary for the proper servicing and maintenance

of all equipment. Manuals are to include plain paper copies

of approved shop drawings and catalog cuts. The quality of

the copies may be subject to approval by the Engineer. Upon

completion and approval, 3 copies will be forwarded to the

Owner and one copy retained by the Engineer.

C. Manuals shall include no less than the following:

1. Operating Procedures:

a. Typewritten procedures indicating each mode of

operation of each piece of equipment or system.

Procedures shall indicate the status of each

component of a system in each operating mode.

b. Procedures shall indicate names, symbol numbers,

valve tags, circuit numbers, schematic control and

wiring diagrams, locations of thermostats, manual

starters, control cabinets, and other controls of

each system.

c. Emergency shutdown procedures for each piece of

equipment or system, both automatic and manual as

appropriate.

2. Maintenance Schedule: Typewritten schedule describing

manufacturer's recommended schedule of maintenance and

maintenance procedures.

3. Catalog cuts and shop drawings:

a. Catalog cuts shall clearly indicate the exact

model and type of each piece of equipment




installed in the Project, including all options

provided.

b. Catalog cuts shall fully describe equipment

including physical, electrical, mechanical and

other characteristics, performance characteristics

and installation or erection diagrams.

c. Catalog cuts shall indicate spare part numbers and

name, address and telephone number of local

representative or service department.

4. Typewritten list of all subcontractors on the Project

including name, address, telephone number and

responsibility on the Project.

5. Manuals shall be indexed with dividers indicating each

system or piece of equipment.

6. Warranties, permits, inspection stickers/approvals and

Certificate of Occupancy are to be included.

D. Required equipment warranties shall be submitted in three

copies to the Engineer.

E. The Contractor shall video tape all instructional sessions

and demonstrations and provide the Owner with a copy of the

videotape at the end of all demonstrations.

PART 2 - PART 2 – PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE

PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACTION ON SUBMITTALS

A. One copy of all submissions will be returned to the

Contractor for his files. The Contractor shall mark up

other copies so as to conform with the copy returned to him

and forward them to all interested Contractors,

Subcontractors, and Suppliers.

B. The Engineer will review and stamp submitted shop drawings

in one of the following ways (the actual stamp may be

different; below language is shown for an example only)

1. "No Exceptions Taken": Approved.




2. "Make Corrections Noted": Approved, provided the work

complies with corrections marked on the submittal.

3. "Revise and Resubmit": Do not commence work of this

submittal. Revise and resubmit or prepare a new

submittal; comply with notations marked on submittal.

4. "Rejected": Fundamentally not in compliance. Prepare

a new submittal. No notations or comments made.

C. Work shall be executed in accordance with "Approved",

"Approved As Noted", or "Resubmit for Record" stamp only.

D. Engineer's review of shop drawings/submittals will

constitute checking for general arrangement only, and shall

not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for complete

compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Contractor

shall be responsible for quantities and dimensions to assure

a proper fit under field conditions.

3.2 DISTRIBUTION

A. Provide additional distribution of submittals, not included

in foregoing copy submittal requirements, to subcontractors,

suppliers, fabricators, installers, governing authorities

and others as necessary for proper performance of the work.

Include such additional copies in transmittal to Engineer

where required to receive Action marking before final

distribution. Show such distributions on transmittal forms.

3.3 COLOR SELECTIONS

A. All colors for all finished surfaces and materials will be

selected or approved by the Engineer. The color selections

will be made at one time to provide a complete and

coordinated color schedule which, upon acceptance of the

Owner, will be provided to the Contractor. Any and all

specific color selections for materials not noted on

drawings or in specification shall be chosen by Engineer

after submittal of samples.

B. It is imperative that all color information be submitted to

the Engineer by the Contractor before color selections can

be made. If any color selection information is not

available when colors are needed to meet the project

schedule, the Engineer will select colors from one of the




named manufacturers in the Specifications, and the

Contractor will be required to exactly match that color. A

claim for delay will not be accepted if the color schedule

is late due to the failure of the Contractor to provide the

Engineer with all required color information, nor will an

extra be entertained if the selected color is not available

from the manufacturer the Contractor intended to use but

neglected to submit.

C. The Contractors are reminded of the requirement to declare

all substitutions within 20 days of execution of their

Contract as specified.




QUALITY CONTROL 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 1.01 TRADESMEN AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Each Contractor shall ensure that tradesmen performing work

at site are skilled and knowledgeable in methods and

craftsmanship needed to produce required quality levels for

workmanship in completed work. Remove and replace work

which does not comply with workmanship standards as

specified and as recognized in the construction industry for

applications indicated. Remove and replace other work

damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its

replacement.

B. In certain instances, specification text requires that

specific work be assigned to specialists or expert entities,

who shall be engaged for performance of those units of work.

These shall be recognized as special requirements over which

Contractor has no choice or option. These assignments shall

not be confused with, and are not intended to interfere

with, normal application of regulations, union jurisdictions

and similar conventions. One purpose of such assignments is

to establish which party or entity involved in a specific

unit of work is recognized as "expert" for indicated

construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, final

responsibility for fulfillment of entire set of requirements

remains with Contractor.

1.2 INSPECTION, TESTS AND REPORTS

A. A. Required inspection and testing services are intended to

assist in determination of probable compliances of the work

with requirements, but do not relieve any Contractor of

responsibility for those compliances, or for general

fulfillment of requirements of Contract Documents. Specified

inspections and tests are not intended to limit any

Contractor's quality control program. Afford reasonable

access to agencies performing tests and inspections.

B. Contractors are responsible for all testing associated with

their work (foundations, soils compaction, concrete, steel,




roof material testing etc.) and shall submit the name of

their proposed testing agency within 15 days of Notice-to-

Proceed. Each Contractor is responsible to coordinate the

activities of the testing agency to assure that work is

tested prior to being covered up or other activities

associated to the work begin.


PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPLACEMENT OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall, within 24 hours after rejection of Work, remove all materials and equipment so rejected and immediately

replace said Work, at his cost, to the satisfaction of the

Architect. Should the Work of the Owner or other Contractors

be damaged by such removal or replacement, the Contractor

shall reimburse the Owner or other Contractors for all cost

incurred for correcting said damage.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site

improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as

existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work,

investigate and verify the existence and location of

mechanical and electrical systems and other construction

affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of

connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of

underground and other utilities and construction indicated

as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,

investigate and verify the existence and location of

underground utilities and other construction affecting the

Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert

elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer,

storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground

electrical services.




2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that

must be performed by public utilities serving Project

site.

3. Contact NJ One-Call prior to ground penetrations.

C. Acceptance of Conditions prior to work starting: Examine

substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or

Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing

conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is

required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work.

b. List of detrimental conditions, including

substrates.

c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.

d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of

substrates, including compatibility with existing

finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical

systems to verify actual locations of connections

before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable

conditions where products and systems are to be

installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the

Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local

utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or

relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines,

services, or other utility appurtenances located in or

affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities

having jurisdiction.




B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities

serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless

permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary utility services according to

requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of

proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without

Owner's written permission.

C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to

fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before

installing each product. Where portions of the Work are

indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of

other construction by field measurements before fabrication.

Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress

to avoid delaying the Work.

D. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and

dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

E. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions:

Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of

the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to

Architect. Include a detailed description of problem

encountered, together with recommendations for changing the

Contract Documents.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify

layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to

existing conditions and dimensions. If discrepancies are

discovered, notify Architect and Owner promptly.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work

accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as

indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work

level.




2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize

space available for maintenance and ease of removal for

replacement.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and

recommendations for installing products in applications

indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will

ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions

required for product performance until Substantial

Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is

subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of

that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Only use the best quality tools and

equipment with proper attenuations for the latest acceptable

sound levels.

F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as

required to anchor each component securely in place,

accurately located and aligned with other portions of the

Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not

indicated, mount components at heights directed by

Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal

expansion and contraction.

G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint

locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints

for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections

together to form hairline joints.

H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and

installation materials that are not considered hazardous.




TEMPORARY FACILITIES 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are

specified in this section, as extensions of provisions in

General Conditions and other Contract Documents. Nothing in

this section is intended to limit types and amounts of

temporary work required, and no omission from this section

will be recognized as an indication that such temporary

activity is not required for successful completion of the

work and compliance with requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Each Contractor is specifically assigned certain

responsibilities for temporary facilities to be used by all

Contractors, other entities at the site, the Owner's work

forces and other personnel including occupants of the

project, the Owner, the Architect, test agencies, personnel

of governing authorities, and similar entities and personnel

authorized to be at the project site during construction.

In general, each Contractor is assigned the responsibilities

for installation, operation and removal of each temporary

facility which is related by recognized trades to its scope

of contract work; and, except as otherwise indicated, each

is responsible for costs and use charges associated there-

with, including fuel, power usage, water usage and similar

usage costs. The Contractor is responsible for temporary

facilities not related to any other Contractor's scope of

contract work and not otherwise specifically assigned, as

designated by the Architect.

C. No costs or usage charges for temporary facilities are

chargeable to the Owner, nor can any Contractor's cost or

usage charges for temporary facilities be accepted as the

basis for a change order extra. The total costs and usage

charges for temporary facilities are included, collectively,

in the Contract Amounts.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Each Contractor shall provide and operate, in a manner that

complies with all local, state, and federal safety




regulations, all hoists, cranes, helicopters and furnish and

erect all ladders and scaffolding required by him and his

subcontractors, constructed to afford proper protection to

craftsmen, their Work and other Work in progress and

previously executed.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Each Contractor shall establish and initiate use of each

temporary facility at time first reasonably required for

proper performance of the total work of project. Terminate

use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time, when

no longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with

authorized use, replaced the need.

B. Each Contractor shall install, operate, maintain and protect

temporary facilities in a manner and at locations that will

be safe, nonhazardous, sanitary, protective of persons and

property, and free of deleterious effects.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Each Contractor shall provide facilities, establish

procedures, and conduct construction activities in a manner

that will ensure compliance with environmental and other

regulations controlling construction activities at project

site. The Contractor shall designate one person, the

Construction Superintendent or other, to enforce strict

discipline on activities related to generation of wastes,

pollution of air/water/soil, generation of noise, and

similar harmful or deleterious effects which might violate

regulations or reasonably irritate persons at or in vicinity

of project site. Anti-pollution measures required by D.E.P.,

as applicable are to be followed.

1.5 SECURITY

A. The Contractor shall maintain complete security on the site

at all times outside of normal working hours to protect the

Work and all field offices, and to secure the area of

construction by restricting all trespassers.

1. This means locking the doors and gates. A guard is not

required.




2. All areas under construction are to be secured with a

6’ high chain link fence with screening. The fence is

to be maintained on a daily basis, kept straight, plumb

and secure at all times to provide a professional

appearance. Provide gates as necessary for access to

each area.

1.6 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

A. Where mud, snow, ice or other hazardous conditions exist in

the purview (Scope of Work) of any Sub Contractor, the

Contractor shall remove the hazards immediately and replace

with suitable material for the other contractors use. If the

Owner is compelled to remove the hazards with their own

forces due to inaction by the Contractor, then that

Contractor will be back-charged for the work performed by

the Owner.

B. No welding, cutting by torch, or Work utilizing or causing

flammable waste shall be done unless adequate fire

protection is provided and maintained for the duration of

the Work in the area of operations.

1.7 DEBRIS CONTROL (Refer to Section 015240 for further

delineation)

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for daily cleaning up of

spillages and debris resulting from his operations and from

those of his Subcontractors; and shall be responsible for

complete removal and disposition of hazardous and toxic

waste materials. The Contractor shall provide containers at

grade, sufficient for the depositing of

nonhazardous/nontoxic waste materials, and shall remove such

waste materials from project site at least weekly during

cold weather (daily high temperatures below 50oF) and at

least twice weekly during mild and warm weather.

1. Contractor is responsible to provide all dumpsters.

B. The Contractor shall daily clean all mud, dirt and debris

resulting from all trades operations from the adjacent

streets, sidewalks, drives and parking areas and shall

repair all damage caused by the cleaning to the satisfaction

of the Owner.




C. The Contractor is to provide and maintain appropriate means

of safe trash disposal (i.e., chutes) to grade/dumpster.

Multiple units may be required and shall be figured for in

the bid.

D. The contractor shall prevent intrusion of dust, debris,

sound, odor, equipment, etc. into the occupied spaces.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

PART 3 - ENCLOSURES

A. At earliest possible date, the Contractor shall secure

project area against unauthorized entrance at times when

personnel are not working. Provide secure temporary

enclosure at ground floor and other locations of possible

entry, with locked entrances.

B. Where any form of demolition will expose the interior of the

building to weather, demolition shall follow the erection of

weatherproof walls by the Contractor installed inside the

demolition line, sealed and flashed, as required, to keep

all water from the building interior. Keep temporary

weatherproofing in place until new construction has been

completed to the stage where water will not enter the

building.

C. The Contractor shall provide constant protection against

rain, wind, storms, frost or heat to maintain the work,

materials, apparatus and fixtures free from damage. At the

end of each day's work, cover work likely to be damaged.

During cold weather, protect work from damage by freezing

and provide such enclosures and heating apparatus as may be

necessary diligently to prosecute the Work without stoppage

for reason of unfavorable weather.

D. Wherever a Contractor provides openings through walls or

slabs, each location shall be adequately protected at the

end of each working day with temporary enclosures to make

these areas tight. Openings through exterior walls shall be

watertight.

E. Contractor is to maintain the building in a water tight

condition during all construction activities by whatever

means necessary. Contractor is to never do any more removal




work during any given day than that contractor can replace

in the same day in order to make sure the occupants of the

building will be protected from the possibility of water

leakage into the building. Should any leakage occur, the

contractor is to immediately make the building water tight

(on a 24 hour basis) and repair any damage caused by the

leakage or replace any equipment damaged by the leakage.

3.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY

A. Power is available on site.

3.3 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. A trade requiring ventilation for Work shall provide fans to

induce circulation of air provided prior approval has been

obtained from the Owner.

3.4 TEMPORARY TELEPHONES

A. Each Contractor is responsible for their own telephone

service and for payment of all charges relating to that

service.

3.5 TEMPORARY WATER

A. Water is available on site.

3.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Starting at time of start of work at project site, the

Contractor shall provide and maintain self-contained toilet

units of type acceptable to governing authorities, adequate,

at all stages of construction, for use of personnel at

project site. Provide separate facilities for male and

female personnel when both sexes are working, in any

capacity, at project site. Facilities shall remain in use

until completion of project. Use of permanent facilities

will not be permitted.




3.7 REMOVAL AND RESTORATION

A. Prior to acceptance of the Project, each contractor shall

remove temporary work for which he has been responsible.

3.8 OWNER'S RIGHTS

A. If any Contractor fails to carry out his responsibilities in

providing temporary facilities, as set forth above, the

Owner/Owner shall have the right to take such action as he

deems proper for the protection and conduct of the Work, and

to deduct the cost thereof from the amount due the

Contractor at fault.

B. Extended work days, hours, shifts, weekend work, etc. may be

allowed upon coordination and approval by Architect,

Owner at no additional cost to the Owner.

1. Should the schedule begin to slip, for any reason, each

contractor will be required to work additional shifts

or weekends to recover the lost time. Should there be a

cost to the College for this overtime work, the

contractor will be required to reimburse the owner for

said costs.




PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013220 - 1

SECTION 013220 – PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,

including General and Supplementary Conditions and other

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural

requirements for the following work by the General

Contractor (other primes are encouraged to document the

site and construction, but not required):

1. Preconstruction video documentation.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. All of Division 1.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For photographer.

B. Media: Submit 3 copies of recordings on CD

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied

label with the following information:

a. Name of Project.

b. Name and address of photographer.

c. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Date recorded.

f. Description of vantage point, indicating

location, direction (by encompass point), and

elevation or story of construction.



PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013220 - 2

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been

regularly engaged as a professional photographer of

construction products for not less than three years.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and

provide auxiliary services requested, including access to

Project site and use of temporary facilities, including

temporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lit

photographs without obscuring shadows.

1.6 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from

photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of

photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Format: Provide recordings on CD in mp4 / avi format

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION RECORDINGS

A. Photographer: Engage a qualified commercial videographer

to record construction video.

B. Preconstruction Recording: Before starting demolition or

construction record, record Project site, interior and

exterior.

1. Show protection efforts by Contractor.




CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITION

A. Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements

near end of Contract Time, in preparation for final

acceptance, final payment, normal termination of Contract,

occupancy by Owner and similar actions evidencing completion

of the work. Specific requirements for individual units of

work are specified in sections of Divisions 2 through 16.

Time of closeout is directly related to Substantial

Completion, and therefore may be either a single time period

for entire work or a series of time periods for individual

parts of the work which have been certified as substantially

complete at different dates. That time variation, if any,

shall be applicable to other provisions of this section.

B. Substantial completion shall be defined that every material

item has been installed. Nothing is missing and therefore,

the punch list can begin.

1.2 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Prior to requesting the Architect's inspection for cer-

tification of substantial completion, for either entire work

or portions thereof, complete the following and list known

exceptions in request:

1. In progress payment request coincident with or first

following date claimed, show either 100% completion for

portion of work claimed as substantially complete, or

list incomplete items, value of incomplete items, and

reasons for being incomplete.

2. Include supporting documentation for completion as

indicated in these Contract Documents.

a. Prepare a list of items to be completed and

corrected (punch list), the value of items on the

list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

3. Submit statement showing accounting of changes to the

Contract Sum.




4. Advise Owner of pending insurance change over

requirements.

5. Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance

bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and

similar documents.

6. All fire sprinklers, devices, alarm system, roofing

system, doors, insulation, etc. requiring FM Research

approval to submit certification from Factory Mutual.

7. Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner's full and

unrestricted use of the work and access to services and

utilities, including occupancy permits, operating

certificates, and similar releases.

8. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials,

and similar physical items to Owner obtaining a signed

receipt of materials delivered. Refer to individual

work sections for required quantities of spare parts,

extra and overrun stock, maintenance tools and devices,

keys, and similar physical units to be submitted.

9. Complete start up testing of systems, and instructions

of Owner's operating/maintenance personnel.

Discontinue, or change over, and remove from project

site temporary facilities and services, along with

construction tools and facilities, mockups, and similar

elements.

10. Complete final clean up requirements.

11. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred

exposed finishes.

12. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection

for Substantial Completion to Project Manager. On

receipt of request, Architect and Project Manager will

either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of

unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the

Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection,

the Project Manager will notify Contractor of items,

either on Contractor's list or additional items

identified by Architect that must be completed or

corrected before certificate will be issued.

13. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work

identified in previous inspections as incomplete is

completed or corrected.




14. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of

requirements for Final Completion.

B. Upon receipt of Contractor's request, the Project Manager

and Architect will proceed with substantial completion

inspection. Following inspection, the Architect will either

prepare the certificate of substantial completion, or advise

the Contractor of work which shall be performed prior to

issuance of certificate. The work remaining to be

performed shall be completed prior to the punch list for

final acceptance.

C. Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that work has been

completed, including all punch list items, but excepting

incomplete items delayed because of circumstances acceptable

to the Project Manager and Architect, the Project Manager

and Architect will reinspect the work. Upon completion of

reinspection, the Architect will either prepare the

certificate of final acceptance or advise the Contractor of

work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required

for final acceptance.

D. In the event that the work is not completed or obligations

are not fulfilled as required for final acceptance and the

Architect/CM is required to reinspect the work more often

than the two inspections described, the Contractor shall

compensate the Architect and/or the Project Manager at the

rate of $500.00 for each additional site visit required for

reinspections. The compensation shall be processed by

change order as a deduction to the Contractor's Contract

Sum, which amount will be paid to the Architect or Project

Manager by the Owner, through a change order as an addition

to the Architect's or Project Manager’s Contract Sum.

E. Substantial Completion shall be defined for this project

that every element of the project/construction and the

contract, based on the contract and amended drawings and

specification sections, is installed and the building / work

is deemed complete, less repairs and/or touch up type work

that would be generally referred to as punchlist work. If

any components of the building, or site work associated with

this contract are not installed, the project cannot be

deemed substantially completed.




1.3 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Prior to requesting Project Manager and Architect's final

inspection for certification of final acceptance and final

payment, complete the following and list known exceptions,

in request:

1. Submit final payment request with final releases and

supporting documentation not previously submitted and

accepted. Include certificates of insurance for

products and completed operations where required.

2. Submit release of liens for all subcontractors.

3. Submit Contractor's statement that his final

application, as presented, is the final bill and no

other claims will be presented.

4. Submit updated final statement, accounting for

additional changes to Contract Sum including change

orders and allowances.

5. Submit certified copy of Architect's final punch list

of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating

that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved

for acceptance, endorsed and dated by Architect.

6. Submit one set of record documents, bound copies of

maintenance/operating manuals, final project

photographs, damage or settlement survey, property

survey, and similar final record information.

7. Complete final clean up requirements.

8. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred

exposed finishes.

9. Submit notarized consent of surety to final payment.

10. Submit final liquidated damages settlement state-

ment, if required, acceptable to Project Manager and

the Owner.

11. Revise and submit evidence of final, continuing

insurance coverage complying with insurance require-

ments.

12. A letter from the Owner's representative certifying

that he has been properly instructed in the opera-

tion and maintenance of equipment by the Contractor.

13. 10% one year Maintenance Bond.




14. Underwriter's Certificate or Electrical Sub Code

Official's Approval.

15. Fire Alarm Certification and Description - NFPA form

72C including local County of Chester.

16. HVAC Contractor to submit certified balancing

report.

17. Final acceptance by Architect of record documents

B. Except as otherwise indicated or requested by Project

Manager/Architect, remove temporary protection devices

and facilities that were installed during course of the

work to protect previously completed work during

remainder of construction period.

1.4 CLEAN UP

A. Remove waste materials from site and dispose of in a

lawful manner.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CLEANING

A. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion

of associated work have become Owner's property, dispose

of these to Owner's best advantage as directed.

B. After Substantial Completion of the Work, each Contractor

shall do the final cleaning of the surfaces of his

installations as may be required by the various

Specification sections.

C. After each Contractor has cleaned their work, The General

Contractor shall engage a professional cleaning service

to perform final cleaning of the work consisting of

cleaning each surface or unit to normal clean condition.

Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning

operations and chemicals. The following are examples,

but not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels

required:




1. Remove labels that are not required as permanent

labels.

2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and

window/door glass, to a polished condition, removing

substances that are noticeable as vision obscuring

materials. Replace broken glass and damaged

transparent materials.

3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surfaced

finishes, to a dirt free condition, free of dust,

stains, films and similar noticeable distracting

substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid

disturbance of natural weathering of exterior sur-

faces. Restore reflective surfaces to original

reflective conditions.

4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment

clean, including elevator equipment and similar

equipment; remove excess lubrication and other

substances.

5. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access

spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches,

equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar

spaces.

6. Vacuum and clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft

surfaces.

7. Clean light fixtures and lamps to function with full

efficiency.

8. Clean and wax or polish all hard floors following

manufacturer’s instructions.

9. Clean all window surfaces inside and outside.

10. Perform final cleaning in, on and around all

casework, sinks, toilets fixtures, etc.

11. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas

disturbed by construction activities, including

landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste

material, litter, and other foreign substances.

12. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical

spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

13. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a

smooth, even-textured surface.




14. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and

surplus material from Project site.

15. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to

building.

16. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced

finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains,

films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid

disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces.

Restore reflective surfaces to their original

condition.

17. Sweep concrete floors broom clean.

18. Replace parts subject to unusual operating

conditions.

19. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition,

free of stains, including stains resulting from

water exposure.

20. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent

air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers,

registers, and grills.

21. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were

operated without filters during construction.

22. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors

to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-

out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of

use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent

and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with

requirements for new fixtures.

23. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn

waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials

on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful,

or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove

waste materials from Project site and dispose of

lawfully.




3.2 RECORD DOCUMENTS (Refer to Section 013400, FOR project

requirements for submitting Record Documents)

3.3 REMOVE TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. At the completion of the work prior to final payment,

remove all temporary facilities entirely from site,

including, but not limited to, the following: Field

offices, trailers, shanties, sheds, job telephone,

temporary toilets, temporary enclosures, dust barriers

and other temporary protection devices.




PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 013400 - 1

SECTION 013400 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project record documents consisting of:

a. Record drawings.

b. Record project manual (specifications).

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Submit after substantial

completion, but prior to final completion.

1. Record drawings: Submit in form of opaque prints.

a. Sets shall include all drawings, whether changed

or not.

2. Other record documents: Submit originals or good

quality photocopies.

3. Each Sub contractor is responsible for their respective

trade, record documents and record drawings. Combine

with General Contractor record drawing documents for a

complete set.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MAINTENANCE OF PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Do not use record documents of any type for construction

purposes.

B. Maintain record documents in a secure location at the site

while providing for access by the contractor and the

engineer during normal working hours; store in a




fire-resistive room or container outside of normal working

hours.

C. Record information as soon as possible after it is obtained.

D. Assign a person or persons responsible for maintaining

record documents.

E. Record the following types of information on all applicable

record documents:

1. Dimensional changes.

2. New and revised details.

3. Revisions to electrical circuits.

4. Locations of utilities concealed in construction.

5. Particulars on concealed products which will not be

easy to identify later.

6. Changes made by modifications to the contract; note

identification numbers if applicable.

7. New information which may be useful to the owner, but

which was not shown in either the contract documents or

submittals.

3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain a complete set of opaque prints of the contract

drawings, marked to show changes.

B. Where the actual work differs from that shown on the

drawings, mark this set to show the actual work.

1. Mark location of concealed items before they are

covered by other work.

2. Mark either record contract drawings or shop drawings,

whichever are best suited to show the change.

C. When the contractor is required by a provision of a

modification to prepare a new drawing, rather than to revise

existing drawings, obtain instructions from the engineer as

to the drawing scale and information required.

D. Keep drawings in labeled, bound sets.

1. Mark with red pencil.




2. Mark work of separate contracts with different colors

of pencils.

3. Incorporate new drawings into existing sets, as they

are issued.

E. Where record drawings are also required as part of operation

and maintenance data submittals, copy marks to another

opaque print obtained from the engineer.

3.3 RECORD PROJECT MANUAL

A. Maintain a complete copy of the project manual, marked to

show changes.

B. Where the actual work differs from that shown in the project

manual, mark the record copy to show the actual work.

1. Include a copy of each addendum and modification to the

contract.

2. In addition to the types of information required on all

record documents, record the following types of

information:

a. Product options taken, when the specification

allows more than one.

b. Proprietary name and model number of actual

products furnished, for each product, material,

and item of equipment specified.

c. Name of the supplier and installer, for each

product for which neither a product data submittal

nor a maintenance data submittal was specified.

3.4 TRANSMITTAL TO OWNER (through the Engineer)

A. Collect, organize, label, and package ready for reference.

1. Bind print sets with durable paper covers.

2. Label each document (and each sheet of drawings) with

"PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS - This document has been

prepared using information furnished by _____" [insert

the contractor's name], and the date of preparation.




B. Submit to the Engineer four (4) sets of Operation and

Maintenance Manuals in three-ring binders for approval: All

to be submitted at one time, not piece meal.

1. Include all inspection/approvals/certifications

2. All approved cut sheets as well as manufacturer's

operation and maintenance manuals.




CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 015240-1

SECTION 015240– CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural

requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction

waste.

2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction

waste.

3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction

waste.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. All of Division 1 and attached specifications and

drawings that make a part of this contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials

and other solid waste resulting from construction,

remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction

waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials

resulting from demolition or selective demolition

operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction

waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in

landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.




D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for

subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and

subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 4 copies of plan within 30

days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of

salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations.

Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

C. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of

salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations.

Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt

and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and

processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include

manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

E. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt

and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator

facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests,

weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal

regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project

site to comply with requirements in Division 1. Review

methods and procedures related to waste management

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan.

2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each

type of waste and its disposition.

3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation

and verify availability of containers and bins needed

to avoid delays.




4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and

transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.

5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification,

and waste reduction work plan. Indicate quantities by

weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout

waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and

quantities of demolition, site-clearing, and construction

waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities

and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and

whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in

landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste

generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity

for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation

procedures.

1. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will

be sold to individuals and organizations, include list

of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

2. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that

will be donated to individuals and organizations,

include list of their names, addresses, and telephone

numbers.

3. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers

and processors and type of recycled materials each will

accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone

numbers.

4. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials

will be disposed of. Include name, address, and

telephone number of each landfill and incinerator

facility.

5. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method

that will be used for separating recyclable waste

including sizes of containers, container labeling, and

designated location on Project site where materials

separation will be located.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by

Project Manager. Provide handling, containers, storage,

signage, transportation, and other items as required to

implement waste management plan during the entire duration

of the Contract.

1. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities"

for operation, termination, and removal requirements.

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on

proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the

Work occurring at Project site.

1. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they

first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and

locations established for salvage, recycling, and

disposal.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste

management operations to ensure minimum interference with

roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied

and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site

necessary for separating materials that are to be

salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities

and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt,

environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on

Project site.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle beverage containers used by on-site

workers.




B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax

credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste

materials shall accrue to Contractor.

C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste

materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by

type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for

controlling recyclable waste until they are removed

from Project site. Include list of acceptable and

unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and

remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without

intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and

shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to

present windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the

weather.

5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and

transport to recycling receiving or processor.

3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Break up and transport paving to

asphalt-recycling facility.

3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat

sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.

3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using

pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For

pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into

component wood pieces and comply with requirements for

recycling wood.




4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces

and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small

pieces.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged,

recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from

Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or

incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste

materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-

site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will

prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials on site.

C. Burying: Do not bury waste materials on site.

D. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property

and legally dispose of them.

E. Washing waste materials into sewers or drains is not

permitted.




VOC LIMITS FOR ADHESIVES, SEALANTS 018114-1

AND ARCHITECTURAL COATINGS

SECTION 018114 - VOC LIMITS FOR ADHESIVES, SEALANTS, AND

ARCHITECTURAL COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for reduced-emission,

reduced-toxicity construction adhesives, sealant and

architectural coatings.

B. RELATED SECTIONS:

1. All sections in the Specifications with interior

adhesive or sealant applications.

2. Painting: Division 9.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS / QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Adhesives (VOC Content): South Coast Air Quality

Management District Rule #1168 - “Adhesive and Sealant

Applications”, amended 1/7/05: South Coast Air Quality

Management District (SCAQMD), State of California,

www.aqmd.gov.

B. Sealants: (VOC Content): Regulation 8 (Organic

Compounds), Rule 51 (Adhesive and Sealant Products),

amended 5/2/01: Bay Area Air Quality Management District

(BAAQMD), State of California, www.baaqmd.gov.

C. Paints: (VOC Content and Prohibited Compounds): “Green

Seal Standard for Architectural Coating” (GS-11), plus

“Green Seal Standard for Anti-Corrosive Paints” (GC-03).

D. Anticorrosive Paints: “Green Seal Standard for Anti-

Corrosive Paints” (GC-03), Second Edition, 1/7/07.

E. Clear Wood Finishes, Floor Coatings, Stains, Sealers,

Shellacs (VOC Content): South Coast Air Quality

Management District Rule #1113, “Architectural Coatings,”

1/1/04.

http://www.baaqmd.gov/





1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. To the extent feasible, do not store adhesives, sealants,

paints, and other Architectural coatings with materials

that have a high capacity to adsorb VOC emissions (i.e.,

materials which are woven, fibrous or porous in nature,

such as acoustical ceilings, textiles, etc.). Do not store

adhesives, sealants, paints, and other Architectural

coatings in occupied spaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. VOC Content of Adhesives:

1. The volatile organic compound (VOC) content of

adhesives shall not exceed the limits defined in Rule

#1168, “Adhesive and Sealant Applications” of the South

Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), of the

State of California. The VOC limits defined by SCAQMD

(based on 1/7/05 amendments) are as follows. All VOC

limits are defined in grams per liter, less water and

less exempt compounds (determined by U. S. EPA

Reference Test Method 24). Unless otherwise specified

below, the VOC content of all adhesives, adhesive

bonding primers, or adhesive primers shall not be in

excess of 250 grams per liter.

2. Architectural Applications:

a. Wood flooring adhesive: 100.

b. Subfloor adhesive: 50.

c. Ceramic tile adhesive: 65.

d. Drywall and panel adhesive: 50.

e. Cove base adhesive: 50.

f. Multipurpose construction adhesive: 70.





g. Glazing adhesives: 100.

3. Specialty applications:

a. PVC welding: 510.

b. CPVC welding: 490.

c. ABS welding: 400.

d. Plastic cement welding: 250.

e. Adhesive primer for plastic: 550.

f. Contact adhesive: 80.

g. Special purpose contact adhesive: 250.

h. Structural wood member adhesive: 140.

i. Sheet applied rubber lining operations: 850.

j. Adhesive Primer for Traffic Marking Tape: 150.

4. Substrate specific applications:

a. Metal to metal: 30.

b. Plastic foams: 50.

c. Porous material (except wood): 50.

d. Wood: 30.

e. Fiberglass: 80.

5. If an adhesive is used to bond dissimilar substrates

together, the adhesive with the highest VOC content

shall be allowed.

B. VOC Content of Sealants and Sealant Primers:

1. The volatile organic compound (VOC) content of sealants

and sealant primers shall not exceed the limits defined

in Rule #1168, “Adhesive and Sealant Applications” of





the South Coast Air Quality Management District

(SCAQMD), of the State of California. The VOC limits

defined by SCAQMD (based on 1/7/05 amendments) are as

follows. All VOC limits are defined in grams per liter,

less water and less exempt compounds (determined by U.

S. EPA Reference Test Method 24).

2. Sealants:

a. Architectural: 250.

b. Non-membrane Roof: 300.

c. Roadway: 250.

d. Roof Membrane: 450.

e. Other: 420.

3. Sealant Primers:

a. Architectural Non-Porous: 250.

b. Architectural Porous: 775.

c. Other: 750.

C. VOC Content of Aerosol Adhesives:

1. The volatile organic compound (VOC) content of aerosol

adhesives shall not exceed the limits defined in “Green

Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesives” (GS-36),

10/19/00. All VOC limits are defined in grams per

liter, less water and less exempt compounds (determined

by U. S. EPA Reference Test Method 24).

2. Aerosol Adhesives:

a. General Purpose Mist Spray - 65% VOCs by weight.

b. General Purpose Web Spray - 55% VOCs by weight.

c. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesives, all types - 70%

VOCs by weight.





D. VOC Content of Paints:

1. The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content of paints

shall not exceed the limits defined in the “Green Seal

Standard for Architectural Coating” (GS-11) as of

5/20/93. The VOC limits are as follows. All VOC limits

are defined in grams per liter, less water.

2. Paint:

a. Non-flat interior coatings: 150.

b. Flat interior coatings: 50.

E. VOC Content of Anti-Corrosive Paints:


shall not exceed the limits defined in the “Green Seal

Standard for Anti-Corrosive Paints” (GC-03), Second

Edition, 1/7/07. All VOC limits are defined in grams per

liter, less water.

2. Anti-Corrosive Paints: 250.

F. VOC Content of Clear Wood Finishes, Floor Coatings,

Stains, Sealers, Shellacs:


shall not exceed the limits defined in the South Coast

Air Quality Management District Rule #1113,

“Architectural Coatings,” 1/1/04.

2. Clear Wood Finishes:

a. Varnish: 350.

b. Lacquer: 550.

3. Floor Coatings: 100.

4. Sealers:

a. Waterproofing Sealers: 250.

b. Sanding Sealers: 275.





c. Other Sealers: 200.

d. Stains: 250.

G. Prohibited Compounds in Paints:

1. Paints shall comply with the prohibited compound

requirements of the “Green Seal Standard for

Architectural Coating” (GS-11), Green Seal, Washington

D.C.

2. Prohibited compounds, as defined in the green seal

standard, shall include:

a. Halomethanes: methylene chloride.

b. Chlorinated ethanes: 1,1,1 trichloroethane.

c. Aromatic solvents: benzene, toluene

(methylbenzene), Ethylbenzene.

d. Chlorinated ethylenes: vinyl chloride.

e. Polynuclear aromatics: naphthalene.

f. Chlorobenzenes: 1.2 dichlorobenzene.

g. Phthalate esters: di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate,

Butyl Benzyl Phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-

octyl phthalate, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl

phthalate.

h. Miscellaneous semi-volatile organics: isophorone.

i. Metals and their compounds: antimony, cadmium,

hexavalent chromium, lead, mercury.

j. Preservatives (antifouling agents): formaldehyde.

k. Ketones: methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl

ketone.

l. Miscellaneous volatile organics: acrolein,

acrylonitrile.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation of all adhesives, sealants,

paints, and coatings with the ventilation and sequencing

criteria defined in Specification section 018119

Construction IAQ Management.

B. When installed over concrete slabs, verify compatibility

of adhesives with curing compounds, leveling agents, or

sealing agents used for slab preparation.




CONSTRUCTION IAQ REQUIREMENTS 018119 - 1

SECTION 018119 - CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the development of a

Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan

(alternatively referred to as the Plan). The Plan shall be

developed by the Contractor, or other qualified party as

approved by the Owner and Architect. The Plan shall be

implemented and documented throughout the duration of the

project construction.

1. The Contractor shall provide, prior to the beginning of

construction, a copy of the IAQ Plan and, upon

completion of the project, the Construction IAQ Summary

Report.

B. Related Sections:

1. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Limits for Adhesives,

Sealants and Architectural Coatings: Elsewhere in

Division 1.

2. All sections of the Specifications related to interior

construction, MEP systems, and items affecting indoor

air quality.

3. All sections including adhesives, sealants, and

architectural coatings products.

4. Painting: Division 9.

1.2 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT GOALS FOR THE PROJECT

A. The Owner has established that this Project shall minimize

the detrimental impacts on Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)

resulting from construction activities. Factors that

contaminate indoor air, such as dust entering HVAC systems

and ductwork, improper storage of materials on-site, poor

housekeeping, shall be minimized.

1.3 REFERENCES, RESOURCES




A. SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under

Construction, First ed., Nov. 1995, The Sheet Metal and

Air Conditioner National Contractors Association. (703)

803-2980, http://www.smacna.org.

B. ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2-1999, “Method of Testing General

Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by

Particle Size”, www.ashrae.org

1.4 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT PLAN - OVERVIEW

A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Construction IAQ

Management Plan to the Owner and Architect for approval.

The Construction IAQ Management Plan shall meet the

following criteria:

1. Construction activities shall be planned to meet or

exceed the minimum requirements included in Chapter 3 of

the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National

Contractors’ Association (SMACNA) “IAQ Guidelines for

Occupied Buildings under Construction”, First Edition,

1995.

2. Absorptive materials shall be protected from moisture

damage when stored on-site and after installation.

3. Filtration media shall be installed to protect ductwork

and/or equipment used during the construction process,

per Item 2.1 (Filtration Media) of this specification.

4. A Sequence of Finish Installation Plan shall be

developed, highlighting measures to reduce the

absorption of VOCs by materials that act as “sinks”.

5. All habitable spaces within the building shall be

subject to an Air Purge (Flush-out) immediately prior to

occupancy.

1.5 IAQ SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor and/or subcontractor shall submit the

following required records and documents:

2. A construction schedule outlining the start-up date and

expected duration of all Construction IAQ Management

Plan control measures.

http://www.smacna.org/

http://www.ashrae.org/




2. A copy of the Construction IAQ Management Plan and the

Sequence Installation Plan, as defined herein.

3. A list of filtration media used, including manufacturer,

model number, MERV value, location installed, and date

of replacement prior to occupancy.

4. Product cut-sheets for all filtration media used during

construction and installed immediately prior to

occupancy, with MERV values highlighted. Cut sheets

shall be submitted with the Contractor’s or

Subcontractor’s ‘approved’ stamp as confirmation that

the products submitted are the products installed on the

project.

5. 18 photographs - 6 photographs taken on 3 different

occasions during construction, labeled with the SMACNA

approach illustrated - that document the implementation

of the Construction IAQ Management Plan throughout the

course of the project construction. Examples include

photographs of ductwork sealing and protection,

temporary ventilation measures, and conditions of on-

site materials storage (to prevent moisture damage).

Photographs shall include integral date stamping, and

shall be submitted with brief descriptions, or be

referenced to project meeting minutes or similar project

documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILTRATION MEDIA

A. If air handlers are used during construction, filtration

media must be used at each return grill and have a Minimum

Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of at least 8, as

determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999.

B. All filtration media shall be replaced immediately prior

to occupancy and must have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting

Value (MERV) of 13, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT PLAN - DETAILED

REQUIREMENTS

A. SMACNA Guidelines, as stated in Chapter 3 of the

referenced “IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under

Construction”, outline IAQ measures in five categories as

listed below. The Construction IAQ Management Plan shall

be organized in accordance with the SMACNA format, and

shall address measures to be implemented by the Contractor

and/or Subcontractors in each of the five categories

(including subsections). All subsections shall be listed

in the Plan; items that are not applicable for this

project should be listed as such.

1. HVAC Protection: Shall include Return Side, Central

Filtration, Supply Side and Duct Cleaning

a. Contractor shall direct subcontractors to protect air

handling and distribution equipment, and air supply

and return ducting during construction. The

designated person will inspect work and monitor

subcontractor(s) to insure compliance.

b. All ductwork arriving on site shall be sealed with

plastic sheeting and stored on pallets or dunnage

until installed.

c. Contractor shall direct subcontractors to cover and

protect all exposed air inlets and outlets, openings,

grilles, ducts, plenums, etc. to prevent water,

moisture, dust and other contaminate intrusion.

d. Contractor shall direct subcontractors to apply

protection immediately after ducting.

e. Ducting runs shall be protected at the end day’s

work.

f. Contractor shall direct subcontractor to inspect

temporary filtration weekly and replace as required

to maintain the proper ventilation rates in the

building.




2. Source Control:

a. Contractor shall direct subcontractors to protect

stored on-site or installed absorptive or porous

materials such as batt.

b. Contractor shall not allow subcontractors to use wet

damaged porous materials in the building.

c. Contractor shall require subcontractors to use low

emitting paints, sealants, adhesives and carpet.

d. Product Substitution.

e. Modifying Equipment Operation.

f. Changing Work Practices.

g. Local Exhaust.

h. Air Cleaning.

i. Cover or Seal.

3. Pathway Interruption:

a. Depressurize Work Area.

b. Pressurize Occupied Space.

c. Erect Barriers to Contain Construction Areas.

d. Relocate Pollutant Sources.

e. Temporarily Seal the Building.

4. Housekeeping: Protect stored on-site or installed

absorptive materials from moisture damage.

a. Store materials on elevated platforms under cover,

and in a dry location.

b. If materials are not stored in an enclosed location,

cover tops and sides of material with waterproof

sheeting, securely tied.




c. Phase construction such that absorptive materials are

installed only in areas that are weathertight.

5. Scheduling.

B. Protection of Materials from Moisture Damage: As part of

the HOUSEKEEPING section of the Construction IAQ

Management Plan, measures to prevent installed materials

or material stored on-site from moisture damage shall be

provided. This section should also describe measures to

be taken if moisture damage does occur to absorptive

materials during the course of construction.

C. Replacement of Filtration Media: Under the HVAC

PROTECTION section of the Construction IAQ Management

Plan, a description of the filtration media in all

ventilation equipment shall be provided. The description

shall include replacement criteria for filtration media

during construction, and confirmation of filtration media

replacement for all equipment immediately prior to

occupancy. Filtration media shall meet the requirements

of Item 2.1 (Filtration Media) of this specification.

D. Sequence of Finish Installation for Materials: Absorptive

materials should be installed after the installation of

materials or finishes which have high short-term emissions

of VOC’s, formaldehyde, particulates, or other air-borne

compounds. Absorptive materials include, but are not

limited to: insulations (exposed to the air stream);

upholstered furnishings; and other woven, fibrous or

porous materials. Materials with high short-term emissions

include, but are not limited to: adhesives, sealants and

glazing compounds (specifically those with petrochemical

vehicles or carriers); paints, wood preservatives and

finishes; control and/or expansion joint fillers; hard

finishes requiring adhesive installation; gypsum board

(with associated finish processes and products); and

composite or engineered wood products with formaldehyde

binders.

2. The Contractor shall develop a sequencing schedule that

identifies how the sequencing will occur for the

project. The schedule shall be submitted to the Owner

and Architect in accordance with Submittal Requirements

specified elsewhere in Division 1, and in all other

applicable sections.




E. If building HVAC systems are used to supply the

ventilation air, filtration media shall be installed per

the requirements of Item 2.1 (Filtration Media) of this

specification.

F. Air Purging (Flush-out): Purging must be conducted after

construction and immediately prior to initial occupancy,

supplying 14,000 cu.ft. of 100% outdoor air per sq.ft. of

floor area, while maintaining an internal temperature of

at least 60 degrees F relative humidity no higher than

60%.

1. Conduct a minimum two-week building flush-out with MERV

13 filtration media and 100 percent outside air.

2. After flush-out, new MERV 13 filters must replace any

filters that are ready for replacement.

G. Implementation and Coordination:

!. The Contractor shall be responsible for implementation

of the Construction IAQ Management Plan, and for the

coordination of the Plan with all affected trades. The

Contractor shall designate one individual as the

Construction IAQ Representative, who will be responsible

for communicating the progress of the Plan with the

Owner and Architect on a regular basis. The Contractor

shall include provisions in the Construction IAQ

Management Plan for addressing conditions in the field

that do not adhere to the Plan, including provisions to

implement a stop work order, or to rectify non-compliant

conditions.

2. Subcontractors shall be responsible for the

implementation of specific control measures, as

specified in the Construction IAQ Management Plan.

Subcontractors shall coordinate their responsibilities

through the Contractor and their designated Construction

IAQ Representative.




SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119- 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of existing interior walls,

partitions, ceiling and soffit systems, finishes, etc.,

as shown on drawings and/or as required to accommodate

new construction.

2. Removal of existing construction and finishes as

encountered during the course of new construction, as

required to accommodate new work.

3. Cutting of existing construction to accommodate new work

as shown on drawings; such cutting to be performed by

skilled craftsmen.

4. Preparation of surfaces at demolition and removal

locations as required to accept new work.

5. Protection of existing building and spaces to remain,

and shoring of the structure as required to maintain

structural integrity and public safety.

6. Erection of temporary dustproof partitions.

7. Removal of debris.


1. Refer to Plumbing and Electrical drawings for specific

removals of plumbing and electrical items.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Demolition Operations: Submit demolition

procedures and operational sequence for Architect's review

prior to start of work. Submit a written request to

Architect well in advance of executing any cutting or

alteration which affects:

1. The work of tying in or connecting to operational

systems of the building, including electrical,

mechanical and security systems.

2. The work of the Owner or any separate Contractor.




3. The structural value or integrity of any element of the

project or of adjacent structures.

B. Notice of Differing Conditions: Submit a written

notification if, during the work of demolition and cutting,

conditions are discovered which significantly vary from

those shown on the drawings. Do not commence work until

approval of Architect.


A. Comply with the requirements of all applicable Federal,

State and local safety and health regulations regarding the

demolition of structures including ANSI/NFPD 241-Building

Construction and Demolition Operations.

B. Assume responsibility for any damage to existing building.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Condition of Structure:

1. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site to examine the

premises; determine existing conditions, character of

equipment and facilities needed for the performance of

the work; and all matters which may in any way affect

the work.

a. Information regarding existing construction is based

on available record drawings which may or may not

accurately reflect existing conditions. Such

information is included on the assumption that it may

be of interest in carrying out the work, but the

Owner, the Architect, and their consultants assume no

responsibility for its accuracy or completeness.

b. Notify the Architect if, during the course of

demolition and removals, conditions are discovered

which significantly vary from those shown on

drawings. Do not proceed until authorization is

received from the Architect.

2. Accept the condition of the site and structures as

encountered. The Owner and the Architect assume no

responsibility for the condition of the site or

structures nor for the continuation of the conditions

existing at the time of bidding or thereafter.




B. Occupancy: The Owner will vacate areas of demolition but

will continue to occupy the building. Conduct demolition

work so that the Owner's operations will not be

acoustically, environmentally or physically disturbed.

Give not less than 72 hours notice to Owner of activities

that will affect Owner operations. Under no circumstances

shall the Owner's activities be disturbed during demolition

operations.

C. Unforeseen Conditions: Should unforeseen conditions be

encountered that affect design or function of project,

investigate fully and inform the Architect. While awaiting

the Architect's response, reschedule operations if

necessary to avoid delay of overall project.

D. Partial Removal: Items of salvageable value must be

transported from the site as they are removed.

1. Owner retains the right of first refusal on all removed

items; coordinate therewith before disposal.

2. Storage or sale of removed items on the site will not be

permitted.

E. Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and debris removal

to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,

and other adjacent occupied or used facilities provide in

kind alternate routes to insure sufficient means of are

maintained.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other

occupied or used facilities without permission of the

Owner. Provide alternate routes Signage and traffic

control around closed or obstructed traffic ways if

required by governing regulations.

F. Utilities: Maintain existing utilities required to remain;

keep in service and protect against damage during

demolition operations.

1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or

used facilities, except when authorized in writing by

the Owner. Provide temporary services during

interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to

governing authorities.

2. Coordinate all work with the Owner and local utility

companies having jurisdiction.




3. Before starting any work relating to existing utilities

(electric, water, fire lines, etc.) that will

temporarily discontinue or disrupt service to remaining

structures, notify the Architect and the Owner 7 days in

advance and obtain the Owner's approval in writing

before proceeding with the work.

G. Examination of Existing Conditions: Inspect existing

masonry bearing walls prior to commencing work, and

determine the necessity for control joints and/or repair

work required. Report any deficiencies to the Architect

and await further instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Take full precautions to protect workmen, general public,

Owner's personnel, and all other persons from falling

debris and other hazards of demolition operations.

B. Execute demolition work to ensure protection of existing

portions of building against damages which might occur from

falling debris or other causes. Do not interfere with use

of adjacent occupied areas. Maintain free, safe passage to

and from adjacent properties.

C. Do not load structure with weight that will endanger,

overload, or cause excessive deflection of existing

structure, or that will damage finished surfaces adjacent

to and/or supported by existing structure, except portion

being removed.

D. Provide, erect and maintain catch platforms, lights,

barriers, warning signs, and other items as required for

protection of workmen engaged in demolition and removal

operations, occupants of the building, public and adjacent

property.

1. Assume responsibility for any and all damages which may

arise or occur to any party by reason of neglect in

providing proper lights, guards, barriers, or any other

safeguards.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with drawings and




specifications to determine extent of demolition required.

B. Insofar as is practicable, arrange operations to reveal

unknown or concealed structural conditions for examination

and verification before removal or demolition.

C. Verify actual conditions to determine in advance whether

removal or demolition of any element will result in

structural deficiency, overloading, failure, or unplanned

collapse.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Pollution Controls:

1. Use temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to

limit the amount of dust and debris rising and

scattering in the air to the lowest practical level.

Comply with governing regulations pertaining to

environmental protection.

a. Do not use water for dust control.

2. Clean adjacent surfaces and improvements of dust, dirt

and debris caused by demolition operations. Return

adjacent areas to conditions existing prior to start of

the work.

B. Temporary Shoring:

1. Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural

supports as required to preserve stability and prevent

movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and

finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or

uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being

demolished.

a. Strengthen or add new supports when required during

progress of selective demolition.

C. Temporary Partitions:

1. General: Provide substantial construction designed by

the Contractor to provide effective protection as

required.

a. Isolate demolition operations from other areas. Seal

joints and perimeters (including doors) against

passage of dust and dirt. Insulate to provide noise




protection to occupied areas.

2. Construct temporary partitions in a manner at least

equal to the following (or superior, if necessary to

provide effective protection specified):

a. Wood studs covered with 1/2 inch thick plywood

sheathing.

3. Gypsum board surfaces adjacent to occupied areas, with

joints taped.

a. Equip partitions with doors where access is required.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to

the extent required by new construction and as indicated in

the contract documents. Use methods required to complete

the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as

follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from

higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition

operations above each floor or tier before disturbing

supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to

dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely

to damage construction to remain or adjoining

construction and that will provide proper surfaces for

patching of finish surfaces and installation of work by

others. Use hand tools or small power tools designed

for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to

minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily

cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into

concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished

surfaces. Execute cutting and demolition by methods

that will prevent damage to other work and will provide

proper surface to receive installation of work by others

and patching of finish surfaces. Do all cutting and

removal so as to leave neat, true, plumb and square

edges. Use carborundum or diamond saw equipment for

cutting masonry or concrete, where edges are to remain.




4. Do not cut or remove construction which might weaken or

impair the integrity or strength of the structural

framing or support systems which are to remain.

5. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of

flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct

and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of

hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations.

Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression

devices during flame-cutting operations.

6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting

torches.

7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous

or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-

site.

8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by

method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground

impact or dust generation.

9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris

and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on

supporting walls, floors, or framing.

10. Dispose of demolished items and materials

promptly. Remove debris daily.

11. Where portions of the structure are to be removed,

protect remaining portions from damage and prepare

existing surfaces to fit new construction. Repair any

damage caused to remaining portions of the structure at

no cost to the Owner.

B. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a

depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction

to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from

reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut

reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete

indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings

to dimensions indicated.

C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at

junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven

saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS




A. Promptly dispose of materials resulting from demolition

operations. Do not allow materials to accumulate on site.

B. Transport materials resulting from demolition operations

and legally dispose of off-site. Pay any and all fees

associated with disposal work.

C. Do not burn removed materials on project site.

D. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or

unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PATCHING

A. Repair excess demolition. Employ skilled workmen to

perform repair work.

B. Where installation of similar new work is included, perform

repairs in manner specified for installation of new work.

C. Where similar new work is not included in the project,

perform repairs using approved materials that are

appropriate to the repair and, where practicable, are

identical to the existing materials being repaired.

D. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas in a manner which

eliminates evidence of repairs.

1. Continuous surfaces: Extend refinish to nearest

intersection, with a neat transition to adjacent

surfaces.

2. Assemblies: Refinish entire unit.

3. Painted piping, conduit, and duct: Clean and repaint.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Remove tools and equipment. Dispose of scrap.

B. Broom clean interior areas.

C. Leave exterior areas free of debris.

D. Clean soil, smudges, and dust from surfaces to remain.

E. Return structures and surfaces to remain to condition

existing prior to commencement of demolition.


ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION JANUARY 15, 2018

ABATEMENT OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS

USING NON-FRIABLE METHODS 028213- 1

SECTION 028213 - ABATEMENT OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS USING

NON-FRIABLE METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Contractor is to provide all labor, materials, equipment,

services, testing, appurtenances, permits and agreements

necessary to perform the work required for the abatement and

proper disposal of all asbestos-containing materials as

required by these contract documents, technical specifications

and all applicable laws and regulations. The work is to be

done in order to facilitate the Forcina Hall HVAC and Roof

Replacement Project. All work shall be performed in

accordance with this Specification, EPA regulations, OSHA

regulations, NIOSH recommendations, and any other applicable

federal, state or local government regulations. Whenever

there is a conflict or overlap of the above references the

most stringent provisions are applicable.

B. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to verify the

exact quantities and locations of all asbestos-containing

materials. The College of New Jersey (TCNJ) and/or

Brinkerhoff Environmental Services, Inc. (Brinkerhoff) assume

no responsibility for the accuracy of quantities and/or

descriptions of materials, or the accuracy of descriptions of

existing conditions. The Contractor shall perform the

following work as described herein.

C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

General and Supplementary Conditions, Drawings and

Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Asbestos Removal and Disposal Project: The work of this

project includes the removal of designated asbestos-containing

materials. All asbestos-containing material (ACM) shall be

removed using non-friable methods.





ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS

Location(s) Material Description Est. Quan-

tity

Main Roof Parapet Wall Tar 400 SF

Main Roof Concrete

End Walls Flashing Caulk 425 LF

Main Roof Exhaust Pipe Insulation 6 LF

Penthouse Roof Parapet Wall Tar 225 SF

Penthouse Base on

Main Roof Tar on Fasteners 225 LF

Penthouse Roof Tar on Coping Seams 225 LF

1st Floor Roof Step Flashing Tar 60 LF

1st Floor Roof Coping Seam Caulk 60 LF

Penthouse Mechanical

Room

Tar on Floor and Base

of Wall 35 SF


Room

Black Sealant on AHU

Hatch 25 LF


Room Gaskets 35 Pieces


Room Tar Sealant on Walls 35 SF


Room

White Sealant on AHU

Door 15 LF

Ceiling Air Handler

Units Duct Louver Caulk 200 LF

Ceiling Air Handler

Units

Duct Reducer Flange

Caulk 400 LF

SF = Square Feet, LF = Linear Feet, EA = Each

B. Project schedule is as per the Owner. Time is of the essence;

abatement contractor shall conform to the schedule to as

determined by the owner to meet school calendar requirements.

Multiple mobilizations may be required.

C. N.J.A.C.8:60 and 12:120 Asbestos Control and Licensing Act

(NJSA 34:5A-32 et seq.), Occupational Safety and Health

Administration (OSHA) regulations 29 CFR Part 1910. 1001 and

29 CFR 1926.1101, et al, and National Emission Standards for

Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) 40 CFR Part 61 shall be the

rules for this project.





D. There will be no unauthorized persons allowed in the Building

or structures during this project. Access to the work areas

shall be restricted to the Contractor, Environmental

Consultant, and authorized visitors.

E. All work will occur, during times described in the General

Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and this Specification

unless authorized by the Environmental Consultant responsible

for this project. Building will be occupied throughout the

abatement period.

F. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, services,

insurance and equipment necessary for the complete removal of

all asbestos materials. Refer to the General Conditions of

the Project Manual for specific insurance requirements.

G. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to all precautions

necessary for the safety and health of the workers in

accordance with provisions of OSHA Standards 29 CFR Part

1926.1101.

H. The Contractor shall attend the pre-construction conference.

The Contractor shall present in detail the following

information at the pre-construction conference:

1. A written copy of the Notifications required.

2. A written Progress Schedule.

3. A written plan for preparation of the work site.

4. A written description of the types and quantities of

protective clothing and approved respirators to be used.

5. A written delineation of responsibility of work site

isolation; e.g., barrier construction, signs, security.

6. A written description of all removal methods to be used

including description of types and numbers of negative

air filtration units.

7. A written description of the tools and methods to be used

for clean-up, reconstruction and waste disposal.

8. A written description of emergency procedures to be

followed in case of injury or fire. This section must

include evacuation procedures, source of medical

assistance (name and phone number) and procedures to be

used for access by medical personnel (examples: first aid

squad and physicians).





9. A written copy of all information presented at this

meeting shall be saved and made available upon request to

Local, State or Federal enforcement officials.

I. Emergencies (such as fire or accidents requiring medical

attention) shall take priority over all other requirements of

these specifications.

1.3 SPECIAL JOB CONDITIONS

A. Asbestos abatement Contractor shall not interfere with daily

activities within the remainder of the building or otherwise

affect daily school operations.

1.4 NOTIFICATIONS

A. The Contractor shall notify the following agencies in writing

10 days prior to the start of the asbestos removal project:

1. United States Environmental Protection Agency Region 2, Division of Enforcement and Compliance

Assistance-Air Compliance Branch (DECA-ACB)

290 Broadway -21st Floor

New York, NY 10007-1866

Phone (212) 637-4080

Fax (212) 637-3998

2. New Jersey Department of Health Indoor Environments Program

Consumer and Environmental Health Services

P. O. Box 369

Trenton, NJ 08625-0369

Phone (609) 826-4950

Fax (609) 826-4975

3. New Jersey Department of Labor Division of Public Safety, Occupational Safety & Health

Asbestos Control & Licensing Section

P.O. Box 949


Phone (609) 633-2159

Fax (609) 633-0664

4. NJ Department of Environmental Protection





Division of Solid and Hazardous Waste

Solid and Hazardous Waste Management Program

MAIL CODE: 401-02C

P O Box 420

401 East State Street, 2nd Floor

Trenton, New Jersey 08625-0420

Telephone: (609) 984-6985

Fax: (609) 633-9839

With copies to:

Brinkerhoff Environmental Services, Inc.

1805 Atlantic Avenue

Manasquan, NJ 08736

Telephone: (732) 223-2225

Fax: (732) 223-3666

B. Notification to the agencies in Subpart A above shall be

submitted on the required forms and include the following

information:

1. Name and address of Owner of building.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Address and description of the building, including size,

age and prior use of the facility or area. Estimate of

the approximate amount of asbestos material present in

square feet and/or linear feet, as applies. Designate

room numbers or other location information.

4. Scheduled starting and completion dates for removal.

5. Procedures and equipment (including ventilating system)

that will be employed to comply with Title 40 CFR Part

61. National Emission Standard for Asbestos, and with

Title 29 CFR 1926.1101.

6. The name and address of the monitoring firm to perform

air monitoring on behalf of the Contractor's employees.

7. The name and address of the Department of Environmental

Protection registered waste hauler and the landfill where

the waste will be deposited. The landfill should also

comply with 40 CFR Part 61.

C. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and/or the Environmental

Consultant in writing at least 48 hours in advance to perform

of a final clearance inspection and final clearance air

sampling.





1.5 DOCUMENTATION

The Contractor shall provide the following documentation in

writing before the start of the abatement project:

A. His name, address and license number pursuant to the Asbestos

Licenses and Permits under the jurisdiction of the New Jersey

Department of Labor.

B. The name, address and EPA registration certificate of the New

Jersey Department of Environmental Protection registered waste

hauler and of the New Jersey Department of Environmental

Protection registered landfill where the asbestos waste will

be deposited.

C. The name and address of the Contractor's air monitoring firm

successfully participating in the National Institute for

Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) PAT program, including

the latest result sheet indicating PAT proficiency.

D. A list of workers with valid New Jersey Asbestos removal

permits which will be involved with this project.

E. Documentation that he is familiar with the Occupational Safety

and Health Administration (OSHA); and the U.S. Environmental

Protection Agency (EPA) relating to the application, removal,

disposal and treatment of asbestos.

1. OSHA Safety and Health Standards, namely Title 29 CFR

1926, Section 1926.1101. Asbestos, Chrysotile,

Crocidolite, Amosite, Tremolite, Anthophyllite and

Actinolite and 29 CFR 1910.134, Respiratory Protection

and 29 CFR 1910.1020, Access to Employee Exposure &

Medical Records.

2. EPA Regulations, namely: Subpart M, Title 40 CFR Part 61,

National Emission Standard for Asbestos, Sections 61.140

through 61.156, Effective April 5, 1984.

F. Documentation that employees have received medical

examinations, which are required by OSHA Title 29 CFR

1926.1101. This documentation shall consist of the name and

address of the physician performing the exam(s); the name(s)

of the employee(s) and the date(s) of the exam(s).

G. Material Safety Data Sheet: Submit the Material Safety Data

Sheet, or equivalent, in accordance with the OSHA Hazard

Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) for each surfactant

and encapsulation material proposed for use at the work site.





Include a separate attachment for each sheet indicating the

specific worker protection equipment proposed for use with the

material indicated.

H. Deliver materials to the job site in original, new and

unopened packages and containers bearing the manufacturer’s

name and label, and the following information:

1. Name or title of material

2. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture

3. Manufacturer’s name

4. Thinning instructions

5. Application instructions

1.6 AIR MONITORING AND INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the final clean-up

inspection, which verifies that the enclosure is ready for the

collection of the final air clearance samples, which is

conducted by an independent air-monitoring firm responsible to

the Owner.

B. Air monitoring and visual inspections in and adjacent to the

Work Area will be conducted on behalf of the Owner by the

Environmental Consultant.

C. Maximum Airborne Asbestos Concentrations

Asbestos Concentration

Sample Type fibers/cc Method

Contamination sample outside 0.01 PCM

the work site during removal.

Post Abatement – inside <70 structures/mm2 TEM

the work site, after final <0.01 fibers/cc PCM

clean-up. (Small/Minor Projects)

PCM = Phase Contrast Microscopy

TEM = Transmission Electron Microscopy





1.7 DEFINITIONS

A. The following words, terms, and abbreviations, when used

within this document shall have the following meanings unless

the context clearly indicates otherwise.

1. Abatement: Procedures physically taken to control or elimi-nate fiber release from asbestos-containing building mate-

rials. This includes removal, encapsulation, enclosure, and

repair.

2. Aggressive Sampling: Method of sampling in which the indi-vidual collecting the air sample creates activity by the

use of mechanical equipment during the sampling period to

stir up settled dust and simulate activity in that area of

the building.

3. AIHA: American Industrial Hygiene Association.

4. Airlock: System for permitting entrance and exit while re-stricting air movement between a contaminated area and an

uncontaminated area. It consists of two curtained doorways

separated by a distance of at least three feet such that

one passes through one doorway into the airlock, allowing

the doorway sheeting to overlap and close off the opening

before proceeding through the second doorway, thereby pre-

venting flow-through contamination.

5. Air Sampling: Process of measuring the fiber content of a known volume of air collected during a specific period. The

procedure utilized for asbestos follows the NIOSH Standard

Analytical Method 7400, or the provisional transmission

electron microscopy methods developed by the US EPA, which

are utilized for lower detection levels and specific fiber

identification.

6. Amended Water: Water to which a surfactant has been added.

7. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

8. Area Air Sampling: Any form of air sampling or monitoring where the sampling device is placed at some stationary lo-

cation.

9. Asbestos: Any hydrated mineral silicate separable into com-mercially usable fibers, including but not limited to

chrysotile (serpentine), amosite (cummingtonite-grunerite),

crocidolite (riebeckite), tremolite, anthophyllite and ac-





tinolite.

10. Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM): Asbestos or any materi-al containing more than one-percent asbestos.

11. Asbestos-Containing Waste Material: ACM or asbes-

tos-contaminated objects requiring disposal.

12. Asbestos Handler: Individual, who disturbs, removes, re-

pairs, or encloses friable asbestos material. This individ-

ual shall have completed approved training course(s) and be

in possession of certification issued by NJDOL.

13. Asbestos Handler Supervisor: Individual who supervises the handlers during an asbestos project and ensures that proper

asbestos abatement procedures as well as individual safety

procedures are being adhered to. This individual shall have

completed approved training course(s) and be in possession

of certification issued by NJDOL.

14. Asbestos Handling Certificate: Certificate(s) issued to in-dividuals who have met the criteria established by NJDOL.

15. Asbestos Inspection Report: A report on the condition of a building or structure in relation to the presence and con-

dition of asbestos therein.

16. Asbestos Project: Any form of work performed in connection with the alteration, innovation, modification, or demoli-

tion of a building or structure which will disturb (e.g.

remove, enclose, encapsulate) more than three linear feet

or more than three square feet of friable ACM.

17. Asbestos Safety Technician (AST): A person certified by the New Jersey Department of Community Affairs and hired by the

ASCM Firm to perform final clearance inspections and final

air testing.

18. Authorized Visitor: Building Owner and his/her representa-tive, and any representative of a regulatory or other agen-

cy having jurisdiction over the project.

19. Barrier: Polyethylene sheeting that completely seals off

the work area to prevent contamination of the surrounding

area.

20. Building Owner: Person in whom legal title to the premises is vested unless the premises are held in land trust, in





which instance Building Owner means the person in whom ben-

eficial title is vested.

21. Clean Room: An uncontaminated area or room that is part of worker decontamination enclosure system with provisions for

storage of workers’ street clothes and protective equip-

ment.

22. Clearance Air Monitoring: Employment of aggressive sampling techniques with a volume of air collected to determine the

airborne concentration of residual fibers and shall be per-

formed as the final abatement activity.

23. Construction Permit for Asbestos Abatement: A required per-mit provided by the jurisdictional Buildings Department for

the approval to commence any asbestos hazard abatement.

24. Contractor: The hazardous material removal contractor li-censed in the State of New Jersey to Remove Asbestos.

25. Critical Barrier: Two (2) layers of six (6) –mil polyeth-ylene sheeting that completely seals off the work area to

prevent the distribution of fibers to the surrounding area,

such as the opening between the top of non-movable lights,

HVAC systems, windows, doors, ducts, grills, electrical

outlets, floor drains, sinks, etc.

26. Curtained Doorway: Device that consists of at least three overlapping sheets of polyethylene over an existing or tem-

porarily framed doorway. One sheet shall be secured at the

top and left side, the second sheet at the top and right

side, and the third sheet at the top and left side. All

sheets shall have weights attached to the bottom to ensure

that the sheets hang straight and maintain a seal over the

doorway when not in use.

27. Decontamination Enclosure System: Series of connected

rooms, separated from the Work Area and from each other by

air locks, for the decontamination of workers, materials,

waste containers, and equipment.

28. Employee: An asbestos abatement worker having proper train-ing, instruction and licensing.

29. Encapsulant (sealant) or Encapsulating Agent: Liquid mate-rial which can be applied to ACM and which temporarily con-

trols the possible release of asbestos fibers from the ma-

terial either by creating a membrane over the surface





(bridging encapsulant) or by penetrating into the material

and binding its components together (penetrating encapsul-

ant). This may also be used to seal surfaces from which ACM

has been removed.

30. Encapsulation: Coating or spraying of ACM with a sealant.

31. Enclosure: Construction of airtight walls and/or ceilings between ACM and the facility environment, or around surfac-

es coated with ACM, or any other appropriate procedure as

determined by the Department of Community Affairs, which

prevents the release of asbestos fibers.

32. Environmental Consultant: The firm, hired by the owner, to provide asbestos inspection, sampling, design, and over-

sight services, and to conduct final sample collection and

analysis.

33. EPA or USEPA: United States Environmental Protection Agen-cy.

34. Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System: A three-stage

decontamination enclosure system for materials and equip-

ment, typically consisting of a designated area of the work

area, a washroom, and an uncontaminated area.

35. Equipment Room: Contaminated area or room that is part of the worker decontamination enclosure system with provisions

for the storage of contaminated clothing and equipment.

36. Fixed Object: Unit of equipment or furniture in the Work Area that cannot be removed from the Work Area.

37. Friable Asbestos Material: Asbestos or any ACM that can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder when dry, by

hand or other mechanical pressure.

38. Glove-Bag Technique: Method for removing friable ACM from heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) ducts,

short piping runs, valves, joints, elbows, and other non-

planar surfaces in a non-contained Work Area. The glove-bag

assembly is a manufactured device consisting of a glove-bag

(constructed of at least 6-mil transparent polyethylene),

two inward-projecting long sleeve gloves, one in-

ward-projecting water wand sleeve, an internal tool pouch,

and an attached, labeled receptacle for asbestos waste. The

glove-bag is constructed and installed in such a manner

that it surrounds the object or area to be decontaminated





and contains all asbestos fibers released during the remov-

al process.

39. HEPA-Filter: High efficiency particulate air filter capable of trapping and retaining 99.97 percent of particles (as-

bestos fibers) greater than 0.3 micrometers mass median

aerodynamic equivalent diameter.

40. HEPA Vacuum: A vacuum cleaner equipped with a HEPA filter.

41. Holding Area: Chamber in the equipment decontamination en-closure located between the washroom and an uncontaminated

area.

42. Movable Object: Unit of equipment or furniture in the Work Area that can be removed from the Work Area.

43. Negative Air Pressure Equipment: Portable local exhaust

system equipped with HEPA filtration. The system shall be

capable of creating a negative pressure differential be-

tween the outside and inside of the Work Area.

44. NESHAPS: National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pol-lutants.

45. NIOSH: National Institute for Occupational Safety and

Health.

46. NJDCA: New Jersey Department of Community Affairs

47. NJDOL: New Jersey Department of Labor.

48. NJDEP: New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection

49. Occupied Area: Area of the work site where abatement is not taking place and where personnel or occupants normally

function or where workers are not required to use personal

protective equipment.

50. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

51. Personal Air Monitoring: Method used to determine employ-ees’ exposure to airborne fibers. The sample is collected

outside the respirator in the worker’s breathing zone.

52. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): Appropriate protective clothing, gloves, eye protection, footwear, and head gear.





53. Plastic Sheeting: Polyethylene sheeting of a certain thick-ness as indicated.

54. Plasticize: Cover floors and walls with polyethylene sheet-ing as herein specified as acceptable to the New Jersey De-

partment of Community Affairs.

55. Qualitative Fit Test: Individual test subject’s responding (either voluntarily or involuntarily) to a chemical chal-

lenge outside the respirator face-piece. Three of the most

popular methods include: 1) irritant smoke test; 2) odorous

vapor test; and 3) taste test.

56. Quantitative Fit Test: Exposing the respiratory wearer to a test atmosphere containing an easily detectable, nontoxic

aerosol, vapor or gas as the test agent. Instrumentation,

which samples the test atmosphere and the air inside the

face-piece of the respirator, is used to measure quantita-

tively the leakage into the respirator. There are a number

of test atmospheres, test agents, and exercises to perform

during the test.

57. Removal: Stripping of any asbestos-containing materials

from surfaces or components of a facility or taking out

structural components in accordance with 40 CFR 61 Subparts

A and M.

58. Repair: Corrective action using recommended work practices to minimize the likelihood of fiber release from small dam-

aged areas of ACM.

59. Separation Barrier: A constructed wall with no door that separates the clean area of the work site from the contami-

nated work area having a fire rating, if applicable, and

does not interfere with the means of egress. Polyethylene

sheeting (minimum 2 layers, 6-mil thick) shall be placed on

the work area side of the barrier so that it completely

seals off the work area to prevent the distribution of fi-

bers to the surrounding area.

60. Shower Room: Room between the clean room and the equipment room in the worker decontamination enclosure with hot and

cold running water controllable at the tap and arranged for

complete showering during decontamination.

61. Surfactant: Chemical wetting agent added to water to im-prove penetration.





62. Visible Emissions: Emissions containing particulate materi-al that are visually detectable without the aid of instru-

ments.

63. Washroom: Room between the Work Area and the holding area in the equipment decontamination enclosure system where

equipment and waste containers are wet cleaned and/or HEPA-

vacuumed prior to disposal.

64. Wet Cleaning: Removal of asbestos fibers from building sur-faces and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning

tools which have been dampened with amended water.

65. Work Area: Designated rooms, spaces, or areas of the build-ing or structure where asbestos abatement activities

take(s) place.

66. Worker Decontamination Enclosure System: Portion of a de-contamination enclosure system designed for controlled pas-

sage of workers and authorized visitors, consisting of a

clean room, a shower room, and an equipment room separated

from each other and from the Work Area by airlocks and cur-

tained doorways.

67. Work Site: Premises where abatement activity is being per-formed. May be composed of one or more Work Areas.

1.8 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS AND TRAINING

A. All of the Contractor’s workers must have valid training, a

minimum of one (1) year experience in asbestos abatement, of

which six (6) months must have been performed within the State

of New Jersey. Each worker must possess a valid and current

asbestos worker’s permit as issued by the State of New Jersey,

and shall comply with all applicable requirements of N.J.S.A.

34:5A-32 and 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k)(3), as well as other non-

training requirements of 29 CFR 1926.

B. The Contractor shall furnish proof that all of the Contractors

personnel on site have been given medical examinations as

required by 29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926. At a minimum, the

examination should include a medical history with specific

reference to respiratory disease and a pulmonary function

test. Additionally a chest roentgenogram shall have been

performed in the last five years. This information should be

provided after Notice of Award and prior to the pre-

construction meeting.





C. The Contractor shall provide a Certified, Licensed Asbestos

Supervisor to the project with a minimum of two (2) years’

experience in asbestos abatement within the State of New

Jersey. The experience should be at a minimum equivalent in

size and scope as to this project. The Contractor shall

submit a copy of the Supervisors qualifications to the Owner.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT

A. General Duties

1. The Environmental Consultant shall perform all final

clearance inspections and collect final air samples and

shall be thoroughly familiar with these Specifications.

B. Authority & Compliance Responsibilities

1. The Environmental Consultant shall have the authority to

direct the actions of the Contractor verbally and in

writing to assure compliance during the final inspection.

In the event of continual noncompliance or serious

violation, the Environmental Consultant shall notify the

Owner, and as necessary, the appropriate governmental

agency.

C. Reporting of Air Sampling & Analysis Data

1. The Testing Laboratory shall conduct all required

analyses within the time frame specified and in

conformance with specified analytical procedures and

shall report the results of such tests to the

Environmental Consultant.

D. Removal Phase

1. Pressure monitoring of the work areas will be performed

by the contractor

a. Pressure differential of greater than or equal to

0.02 inches W.C. shall be monitored by digital

manometers, provided by the Contractor, with

continuous printout or other approved low pressure

monitoring devices. Sensor tubes used for

monitoring shall be placed so that the air

filtration devices shall not cause false readings.

b. One or more separate digital pressure monitoring

systems with continuous printout shall be provided

by the Contractor and installed near the entrance(s)





to each work area and between the work area and any

interior spaces from which make-up air is drawn.

c. Written documentation of pressure differential shall

be provided by continuous printout from the

installed monitoring device. The contractor

supervisor will ensure, prior to the completion of

the work shift, the integrity of the containment

site before workers depart.

2. Record Keeping: Record in a daily log all on-site

observations and required activities of the removal

specification and quality assurance program (such as

smoke tests and negative air filtration unit pressure

gauge readings).

E. Post Removal Test

Provide monitoring of the Work Area(s) during clean-up, within

48 hours of final cleaning, and before removal of critical

barriers. This test is required to establish safe conditions

for removal of critical barriers and to permit reconstruction

activity to begin. Sufficient time following clean-up

activities shall be allowed so that all surfaces are dry

during monitoring.

1. Sampling Procedure: Filter cassettes and sampling train

shall be assembled as specified in (EPA 560/5-89-001)

Guidelines for Conducting the AHERA TEM Clearance Test to

Determine Completion of an Asbestos Abatement Project.

Pumps shall be calibrated before and after sampling and a

record kept of this calibration.

2. Sampling Frequency & Location: Take at least five

representative samples of Work Area where asbestos-

containing materials have been removed. Five samples

outside the worker area and three field blanks.

3. Analysis:

a. Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) for large

projects >160 square or 260 linear feet of asbestos-

containing material.

b. Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) for small and minor

projects <160 square or 260 linear feet of asbestos


4. Time for Laboratory Analysis: Maximum turnaround time

upon completion of sample is seventy-two (72) hours after

submission of samples to the laboratory.





5. Evaluation Criteria: If test results exceed the

clearance criteria, the Environmental Consultant shall

inform the Contractor and the Owner.

a. The Contractor shall be required to re-clean all

surfaces using wet cleaning methods and provide

negative HEPA filtered exhaust air during the re-

cleaning process. This process of re-cleaning,

allowing surfaces to dry and retesting shall be

repeated until compliance is achieved.

6. Certificate of Completion: When the evaluation criteria

are met, the Owner shall receive a Certificate of

Completion from the Environmental Consultant.

F. Submission of Final Report

1. Upon completion of all asbestos removal work and of all

tests, the Environmental Consultant shall submit a

written Final Report to the Owner, including copies of

all backup records documenting the day-by-day progress of

work and related tests. This report shall be presented

in logical form, neatly bound, and properly titled, dated

and signed. Any deviations from acceptable practice on

the part of the Contractor, and any unsatisfactory test

results reported during the course of the job, shall be

highlighted in the Report for record purposes.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

A. Develop and implement a written standard procedure for

abatement work to ensure maximum protection and safeguard from

asbestos exposure of the workers, the non-work areas of the

building, visitors, employees, public, and environment.

B. The standard operating procedure shall ensure:

1. Tight security from unauthorized entry into the

workspace.

2. Restriction of Contractor's personnel to the immediate

Work Area and access/egress routes.

3. Donning of proper protective clothing and respiratory

protection prior to entering the Work Area.





4. Safe work practices in the work place, including

provisions for inter-room communication, exclusion of

eating, drinking, smoking, or in any way breaking the

respiratory protection.

5. Proper exit practices from the work space to the outside

through the showering and decontamination facilities.

6. Removing asbestos in ways that minimize release of

fibers.

7. Packing, labeling, loading, transporting, and disposing

of contaminated material in a way that will minimize

exposure and contamination.

8. Emergency evacuation procedures, for medical or safety

situations, to minimize the potential exposure to

airborne asbestos fibers for emergency personnel,

building occupants, and building environment.

9. Safety from accidents in the workspace, especially from

electrical shocks, fall hazards associated with

scaffolding, slippery surfaces, and entanglements in

loose hoses and equipment. The safety procedures

outlined in the General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions and the requirements of the specifications

must be adhered to as well.

10. Provisions for effective supervision, air monitoring and

personnel monitoring for exposure during the work.

11. Engineering systems that minimize exposure to fibers

within the workspace.

2.2 NOTIFICATIONS, PERMITS, WARNING SIGNS, LABELS AND POSTERS

A. Only licensed contractors may perform work described as

required by this specification. As required by law, the

contractor shall maintain on the project site a valid

Contractors license at all times during the work.

B. The Contractor shall maintain the required number of qualified

personnel on site to complete the project on schedule.

C. ALL CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES MUST POSSESS A VALID NEW JERSEY

ASBESTOS REMOVAL PERMIT AND MAKE AVAILABLE TO THE OWNER AND

THE ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, NJ DCA, NJ DOL, AND NJ DOH THESE

PERMITS UPON REQUEST AT THE PROJECT SITE. ALL EMPLOYEES MUST

HAVE A MINIMUM OF AT LEAST SIX (6) MONTHS PRIOR EXPERIENCE IN

ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WITHIN THE STATE OF NEW JERSEY.





D. The Contractor shall also present to the Owner, prior to the

commencement of abatement that a NJ DEP Registered Waste

Hauler has been contracted to haul the waste off site and to

an appropriate landfill. At the completion of the project the

Contractor will submit a copy of all waste manifests with

their invoice:

E. Erect warning signs around the work space and at every point

of potential entry from the outside and at main entrance to

building which can be viewed by the public without

obstruction, in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k)(7)

(Sign Specifications). The warning signs shall be a bright

color so that they will be easily noticeable. The size of the

sign and the size of the lettering shall be no less than OSHA

requirements.

F. Provide the required labels for all polyethylene bags and all

drums utilized to transport contaminated material to the

landfill in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k)(8) and

by 49 CFR Parts 171 and 172 of the Department of

Transportation regulations.

G. Provide any other signs, labels, warnings, and posted

instructions that are necessary to protect, inform and warn

people of the hazard from asbestos exposure. Post in a

prominent and convenient place for the workers a copy of the

latest applicable regulations from OSHA, EPA, NIOSH, New

Jersey and any additional items mandated for posting by the

aforementioned regulations.

2.3 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

A. Protective clothing shall consist of disposable full body

coveralls with hoods and booties attached. Separate

disposable head covers and foot covering may be substituted if

disposable coveralls without attached hoods and booties are

used. Additional clothing shall include boots or sneakers and

gloves. Eye protection and hard hats shall be available.

Contractors may choose between two types of respiratory

protection as specified (NOTE: Disposable paper respirators

are unacceptable). In order of increasing effectiveness, they

are:

1. Half-face or full-face tight seal respirators equipped

with dual cartridge HEPA filters and certified by the

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

(NIOSH) for use in atmospheres containing asbestos.





2. Powered air purifying respirators certified by NIOSH for

use in atmospheres containing asbestos.

B. The Contractor shall require that each person entering the

Work Area shall wear an approved respirator and protective

clothing. There shall be no exceptions to this rule.

C. The Contractor shall have available sufficient inventory of

protective clothing, respirators, and filter cartridges.

Personal protective equipment inventory shall exceed by a

minimum of 100% the expected daily person-day usage.

D. The Contractor shall provide respirators and disposable

clothing to the Environmental Consultant and any other visitor

authorized by the Owner.

2.4 WORKER EXPOSURE AIR MONITORING

A. In addition to the Environmental Consultant hired by the

Owner, the Contractor shall arrange for air monitoring to be

conducted in all work Areas in accordance with 29 CFR

1926.1101 of OSHA regulations, on behalf of the Contractor’s

employees. The Testing Laboratory employed by the Contractor

shall be accredited by the American Industrial Hygiene

Association for Asbestos or participate and show proficiency

in the NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety

Health) PAT (Proficiency Analytical Testing) program for

airborne asbestos.

B. Personal air sampling for all other waste handling shall also

be conducted as required under any and all applicable OSHA

rules and regulations.

C. Personal samples shall be obtained from employees engaged in

each of the following operations; asbestos and/or

hazardous/universal waste material removal (i.e. spraying,

scraping and brushing), disposal (i.e. bagging) and clean up.

Representative sampling shall be repeated in the event of

major changes in the removal operation. This sampling shall

be done with the sampling media and flow rates specified in

the OSHA Reference (Method 7400 A rules). Samples shall be

taken for the determination of the 8-hour time weighted

average airborne concentration and of the ceiling

concentrations of asbestos fibers.

D. The results of the Contractor’s air monitoring tests (Subpart

B above) shall be returned within 24 hours; copies shall be





provided to each employee monitored as specified by OSHA

Regulation 29 CFR 1910.20.

E. The Contractor shall examine these results and evaluate the

effectiveness of the controls in use (wet methods, exhaust

units and respiratory protection). Copies of these monitoring

tests shall be provided to the Environmental Consultant.

Copies shall also be made available upon request to

representatives of Local, State, or Federal enforcement

agencies.

2.5 CUT AND WRAP ASBESTOS ABATEMENT METHODS

A. Preparation

1. Install critical barriers, or demarcate a regulated area.

Critical barriers may be established around the abatement

area in the form of a mini enclosure.

2. Place asbestos warning signs at all approaches to the

regulated area.

3. Shut down and lock out all air handling systems supplying

air to, from or through the regulated area.

4. Isolate from the regulated area all air handling

equipment.

5. Decontaminate, using HEPA filtered vacuums and wet

methods, and remove from the regulated area all moveable

items.

6. Pre-clean entire regulated area including all immovable

objects using HEPA filtered vacuums and wet methods.

7. Seal with plastic sheeting and tape all penetrations to

the regulated area, including, but not limited to,

corridors, doorways, windows, ducts, grills, diffusers,

etc. When covering and sealing machinery or other

immovable items that may be damaged by being covered with

plastic sheeting, humidity, or other adverse conditions.

The contractor must take whatever action is necessary to

preserve their original condition.

8. Place one layer of six-mil thick plastic sheeting on the

floor of the work area.

9. Where walls do not exist, construct walls using a minimum

of two layers, 6 mil plastic sheeting. 2 x 4 framework

shall support plastic sheeting.





10. Install a changing cubical adjacent to the regulated area

and a dedicated HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner for worker

decontamination.

11. Place work area under negative air pressure utilizing

HEPA filtration systems. Maintain negative air pressure

in the regulated area continuously from the start of

asbestos removal until successful completion of final

clearance air testing. Maintain and record on a strip

chart recorder a negative pressure of at least 0.02

inches of water column, or four complete air changes in

the regulated area per hour based on the total volume of

the area. When determining the number of negative air

units, assume that the actual efficiency of the machine

is 80% of the rated capacity. The exhausts of all

negative air machines must be discharges to the outside

of the building.

12. Limit access to the regulated area to authorized persons

only.

13. Workers entering the regulated area must be provided with

and wear protective equipment and negative pressure

respirators (as a minimum), before commencing any

abatement activities.

14. Maintain a hardbound project logbook at the entrance to

the regulated area. Record the name, social security

number, employer, date, time-in time-out, and the purpose

of entry into the regulated area. Emergency telephone

numbers must be recorded inside the front cover.

15. The above procedures are for small-scale short duration

activities only. Any other use of glove bags will only

be permitted if the regulated area meets all the

requirements of convention removal practices outlined

elsewhere in this specification. Brinkerhoff

Environmental Services, Inc. reserves the right to amend

these procedures to meet specific project requirements or

locations.

B. Asbestos Removal

1. The surface of the insulation must be kept wet at all

times during removal.

2. Perform glove bag procedure at sections of pipe to be

cut, in accordance with manufacturers written

instructions and Paragraph 3.3 of this Section.





3. Wrap with two layers of six-mil polyethylene the length

of piping. Bags or plastic sheeting must be sealed so as

to provide an air tight seal. All bags or items wrapped

in plastic sheeting must be sealed so as to provide an

air tight seal. All bags or items wrapped in plastic

sheeting must be labeled in accordance with OSHA and EPA

requirements.

C. Clean-up and Clearance Testing

1. Wet clean and HEPA vacuum all surfaces within the

regulated area.

2. Notify Brinkerhoff Environmental Services, Inc. for

visual observation and approval to determine

completeness.

3. Spray plastic sheeting and the immediate area from where

the pipe insulation has been removed with a tinted

sealant.

4. Perform no further work until the sealant has dried.

5. Remove all plastic sheeting.



completeness.

7. Notify Brinkerhoff Environmental Services, Inc. to

perform Final Clearance Air Testing.

8. Upon receipt of acceptable air sample results remove

warning signs and barricades.

9. Remove all traces of tape adhesive, and staples. Repair

or make good any damaged caused through abatement

activities.

D. Asbestos Removal

1. The surface of the cement panel must be kept wet at all

times during removal.

2. Remove carefully any mounting brackets, fasteners, nails

or screws. Immediately wet any dry areas that become

exposed as brackets or other retaining mounts are

removed.

3. Every effort must be made to remove the panels in whole

sections.

4. Immediately upon removal the panels must be packaged in

plastic bags. Larger items may be wrapped in two layers





of six mil thick plastic sheeting. Bags or plastic

sheeting must be sealed so as to provide an air tight

seal. All bags or items wrapped in plastic sheeting must

be sealed so as to provide an air tight seal. All bags

or items wrapped in plastic sheeting must be labeled in

accordance with OSHA and EPA requirements.

E. Clean-up and Clearance Testing

1. Wet clean and HEPA vacuum all surfaces within the

regulated area.



completeness.

3. Spray plastic sheeting and the immediate area from where

the cement panel has been removed with a tinted sealant.

4. Perform no further work until the sealant has dried.

5. Remove all plastic sheeting.



completeness.

7. Notify Brinkerhoff Environmental Services, Inc. to

perform Final Clearance Air Testing.

8. Upon receipt of acceptable air sample results remove

warning signs and barricades.

9. Remove all traces of tape adhesive, and staples. Repair

or make good any damaged caused through abatement

activities.

2.6 GLOVE BAG REMOVAL METHODS

Note: When performing glove-bag removal of an exterior material

(i.e. pipe insulation on a roof) some of the following steps

(i.e use of AFDs and negative air pressure) may not apply.

A. Preparation

1. Install critical barriers, or demarcate a regulated area.

Critical barriers may be established around the abatement

area in the form of a mini enclosure.

2. Place asbestos warning signs at all approaches to the

regulated area.





3. Shut down and lock out all air handling systems supplying

air to, from or through the regulated area.

4. Isolate from the regulated area all air handling

equipment.

5. Decontaminate, using HEPA filtered vacuums and wet

methods, and remove from the regulated area all moveable

items.

6. Pre-clean entire regulated area including all immovable

objects using HEPA filtered vacuums and wet methods.

7. Seal with plastic sheeting and tape all penetrations to

the regulated area, including, but not limited to,

corridors, doorways, windows, ducts, grills, diffusers,

etc. When covering and sealing machinery or other

immovable items that may be damaged by being covered with

plastic sheeting, humidity, or other adverse conditions.

The contractor must take whatever action is necessary to

preserve their original condition.

8. Place one (1) layer of 6 mil thick plastic sheeting on

the floor of the work area.

9. Where walls do not exist, construct walls using a minimum

of one (1) layers, 6 mil plastic sheeting. Plastic

sheeting shall be supported by 2 x 4 framework where

existing walls are not present.

10. Install a changing cubical adjacent to the regulated area

and a dedicated HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner for worker

decontamination.

11. Place work area under negative air pressure utilizing

HEPA filtration systems. Maintain negative air pressure

in the regulated area continuously from the start of

asbestos removal until successful completion of final

clearance air testing. Maintain and record on a strip

chart recorder a negative pressure of at least 0.02

inches of water column, or four (4) complete air changes

in the regulated area per hour based on the total volume

of the area. When determining the number of negative air

units, assume that the actual efficiency of the machine

is 80% of the rated capacity. The exhausts of all

negative air machines shall be discharged to the outside

of the building.

12. Limit access to the regulated area to authorized persons

only.





13. Workers entering the regulated area must be provided with

and wear protective equipment and half-face negative

pressure respirators (as a minimum), before commencing

any abatement activities.

14. Maintain a hard bound project log book at the entrance to

the regulated area. Record the name, social security

number, employer, date, time-in time-out, and the purpose

of entry into the regulated area. Emergency telephone

numbers must be recorded inside the front cover.

15. The above procedures are for small scale short duration

activities only. Any other use of glove bags will only

be permitted if the regulated area meets all the

requirements of convention removal practices outlined

elsewhere in this specification. The Asbestos Project

Designer reserves the right to amend these procedures to

meet specific project requirements or locations.

B. Asbestos Removal, Clean-Up and Clearance Testing

1. Perform glove bag procedures in accordance with

manufacturers written instructions.

2. Install glove bag onto piping. Completely seal all

penetrations and seams with adhesive and tape.

3. Smoke test each glove bag prior to performing removal.

Reseal any leaks indicated by the testing.

4. Utilize one glove bag per removal location. Do not move

or slide glove bag once installed.

5. Remove and dispose of all asbestos-containing materials

(ACM) in accordance with OSHA regulations.

6. Spray ACM until saturated with amended water using an

airless sprayer. Apply water throughout removal process

to maintain wet condition.

7. Wet clean and HEPA vacuum all surfaces until pipe is free

of all visible debris.

8. Notify the Environmental Consultant for visual

observation and approval to determine completeness.

9. Spray all surfaces inside glove bag with sealant.

10. Any asbestos-containing insulation edges that have been

exposed as a result of the removal or maintenance

activity must be enclosed using a rewettable glass-fiber

cloth. The glove bag operator must ensure that exposed

edges are completely sealed so as not to release asbestos





fibers to the atmosphere after the glove bag has been

removed.

11. Notify the Environmental Consultant for visual

observation and approval to determine for completeness.

12. Collapse glove bag using HEPA vacuum. Seal bag with tape

and remove from pipe. Place glove bag in a six mil

disposable plastic bag.

13. Notify Testing Laboratory to perform Final Clearance Air

Testing.

14. Re-clean at Contractor's expense, work areas which do not

meet specified final clearance air level.

15. Dismantle and remove remaining plastic sheeting, and any

other materials not previously removed. Thoroughly wet

clean and/or HEPA vacuum work area.

16. Remove all traces of tape adhesive, or similar materials

utilized. Repair or make good any damaged caused through

abatement operations at no additional cost to the Owner.

17. Notify the Environmental Consultant for work area

observation and approval to determine completeness.

2.7 NON-FRIABLE ASBESTOS ABATEMENT METHODS

A. This section applies to the removal of non-friable ACM that

can be removed using methods that do not render the materials

friable.

B. During non-friable abatement of designated exterior non-

friable materials (including caulks and roofing materials)

some of the steps below are not applicable and may be

substituted with the following:

1. Non-friable exterior materials may be abated utilizing

minimal isolation methods.

2. The adjacent ground area must be protected with 6-mil

polyethylene sheeting sufficient to catch all asbestos

material and debris. Polyethylene sheet shall extend

perpendicular to exterior walls and structures a minimum

of 10 feet with an additional 10 feet for each building

story up to a maximum of 50 feet.

3. Adjacent vents, hoods, windows, doors, and other areas of

potential air passage must be sealed with 6-mil plastic

until completion of final visual inspection.





4. The work area must be cordoned off with asbestos caution

tape to a 50 foot radius of the perimeter of the work

area. The tape is to prevent the unknowing entry of non-

asbestos workers into the work area.

C. Sequence Of Work - The following preparation shall be

conducted using approved respirators:

1. Inspection of work areas shall be made by representatives

of the Contractor before any work is initiated to

inventory materials.

2. Caution signs shall be provided and displayed in

accordance with Section 1910.1001(j)(4) of OSHA

regulations, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions

and this specification.

3. Before the work is begun, the Contractor shall clean with

wet cloths or vacuum cleaner equipped with High

Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filters, all items and

equipment, which can be removed without disrupting the

asbestos material. Cloths and filters used for cleaning

shall be disposed of as contaminated waste.

4. The Contractor shall isolate the Work Area and provide an

approved decontamination facility.

5. The Contractor shall establish emergency procedures for

each area and shall post written plans in areas readily

usable by employees. These plans shall include plans for

medical emergencies, fire evacuation and temporary loss

of electrical power and temporary breach of containment

barriers.

D. The following preparations shall be performed in the stated

order utilizing protective clothing and approved respirators.

These respirators shall be at least half-face or full-face

double cartridge respirators approved by NIOSH for use in

atmospheres containing asbestos.

1. Critical Barriers - completely seal off all openings to

the Work Area, including but not limited to, ducts, floor

drains, doorways, corridors, windows and skylights with

two layers of six-mil plastic sheeting taped securely in

place or fastened by spray-on adhesives, glue beads, or

horizontal wood battens.

2. Detach and clean removable electrical, heating and

ventilating equipment and other items connected to

asbestos surfaces. These items shall be removed from the

work area using decontamination procedures and returned





to their proper place when the work area has been

decontaminated.

3. Wet clean all non-removable items not designated for

demolition, in the work area and cover with two layers of

six-mil thick plastic sheeting taped securely in place.

4. The Contractor shall install a two (2) flapped, six (6)

mil polyethylene sheeted air lock at the entrance to the

work area. Entrance flaps are to be installed so that the

flaps will close if air flow into the work area is

stopped for any reason.

5. The Contractor shall provide all ladders, scaffolding

and/or other necessary equipment for the installation of

all engineering controls.

6. The Contractor shall provide and install HEPA equipped

air filtration device(s) (AFDs) within the work area to

create a continuous negative pressure (-0.02” W.C.)

within the work area throughout abatement operations, in

addition to the prevention smoke/fumes from exiting the

work area. This may require more than one (1) AFD

depending on conditions. The AFDs shall be exhausted to

the exterior of the building. Additional requirements

specified within this Technical Specification apply.

E. Removal - The work shall proceed in the following sequence:

1. No removal shall take place until notice to do so is

issued by the Environmental Consultant. Approval of the

work area for removal activity shall not, in any way,

relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to ensure

that non-work areas and items/equipment within the work

area are protected from smoke/fumes, physical damage, or

asbestos contamination from this project.

2. The Contractor shall remove floor tiles in a manner such

that the tiles remain non-friable and, to the degree

possible, intact throughout the removal process. Where

present, carpet shall be cut into manageable sections and

disposed of as regular construction debris if tile is not

affixed to the carpet backing. Otherwise, carpet with

tile residue shall be disposed of as asbestos

contaminated waste.

3. No dry removal of asbestos is allowable.

4. The removal of intact asbestos-containing materials shall

be accomplished without the disturbance of asbestos





materials by removing the component from the non-ACM

substrate as described below.

5. The Contractor shall remove intact asbestos-containing

materials by first wrapping the material with a minimum

of 2-layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting. Once the

material is properly wrapped the component may be

dismantled by either cutting, unbolting, unfastening etc.

the un-insulated, non-asbestos containing portion of the

substrate or fasteners such as bolts, non-ACM adhesives

etc.

6. The asbestos-containing material from each section shall

be picked up and then be packed and sealed into labeled

6-mil plastic bags prior to starting the next section to

prevent the material from drying. Metal shovels shall

not be used to pick up or move asbestos waste. Removed

material shall not be left out of bags overnight or for

more than four hours. However, plastic bags will not be

effective when sharp-edged materials are involved in

asbestos removal. Therefore, contaminated material

containing sharp-edged items shall be placed in small

cardboard boxes and double bagged, or singly bagged and

then placed in temporary fiber drums.

7. All waste shall be disposed in accordance with New Jersey

Department of Environmental Protection requirements and

the 40 CFR Part 6, Subpart M of the EPA regulations. The

outside of all containers shall be wet-cleaned or HEPA

vacuumed before leaving the Work Area. All vacuum

cleaners shall be equipped with HEPA filters.

NOTE: Regulations prescribes a leak-tight container, the

integrity of which is the Contractor's responsibility

until after deposition at a sanitary landfill. Therefore,

caution must be used in the choice of container types and

consideration given to the method of unloading at the

landfill. Fragile containers shall be unloaded by hand to

prevent rupture and possible airborne emissions.

F. After completion of this removal phase (stripping), all

surfaces from which asbestos has been removed shall be

scrubbed using a nylon bristle brush and/or wet cleaned to

remove all visible asbestos containing material. During this

work, the surfaces being cleaned shall be kept wet using

amended water. All disposable equipment shall be packaged for

disposal. Containers shall be washed with amended water and

shall have all exterior particulate matter removed prior to

removal from the contaminated area.





G. All free water (in contaminated areas) shall be retrieved and

added to asbestos contaminated waste and then placed in

plastic lined leak-tight container for disposal.

H. Surface Sealing - After completion of cleaning all exposed

surfaces in the Work Area, and after the Contractor has

conducted a satisfactory pre-sealant inspection the Contractor

shall proceed with the following steps:

1. Spray coat all exposed surfaces with a binding agent such

as diluted clear encapsulant or a water-based paint. The

surfaces to be coated shall include surfaces from which

asbestos-containing materials have been removed (such as

ceilings, structural steel, decking, ducting, pipes,

etc.) and polyethylene which has been used to cover

walls, floor and non-removable fixtures, and equipment.

Over spray from ceiling, walls, fixtures and equipment

will usually be sufficient to coat floor coverings.

Plastic used to maintain critical barriers between Work

Areas and Clean Areas such as those in doorways, windows,

light fixtures, clocks, speakers and air vents shall not

be removed until air monitoring is completed and

satisfactory results have been obtained.

2. After spray coating the plastic sheeting used to protect

floors, walls, fixtures and equipment, (Primary

Barriers), the plastic shall be carefully removed and

rolled up with the contaminated portion inside and

packaged for disposal. Wet clean all walls, floors,

woodwork, ceilings, electric light fixtures and other

surfaces.

I. Final Clean-up - The following operation shall be performed

under negative air conditions with respirators and protective

clothing:

1. All walls, floors and other surfaces shall be cleaned

with damp cloths and/or HEPA vacuumed.

2. Cleaning shall continue until all visible residues have

been removed, including dust, grit and other particulate

matter.

3. Cloths, sponges, etc. used in the cleaning operation


J. After completion of the cleaning operation, the Contractor

shall:





1. Notify the Owner and the Environmental Consultant that a

post removal inspection can be performed to insure all

visible asbestos has been removed and the area is dust

free. The Environmental Consultant will conduct an

aggressive visual inspection of all Work Areas. In

addition to a visual inspection conducted at the floor

level, the Testing Firm to ensure that no visible

asbestos-containing materials have been left above the

ceiling, structural members or other surfaces. All

visible residues must be removed before air monitoring

can be performed.

2. Request air monitoring of the Work Area by the Testing

Firm within 4 hours of a favorable visual inspection in

accordance with these specifications.

3. The Owner and the Testing Firm will then conduct overall

work area clearance testing under simulated conditions of

normal building occupancy known as aggressive sampling as

indicated in the Project Monitoring Specifications. Fans

with a minimum radius of 1' shall be used in each room to

be monitored to stir up any residual invisible fibers

such as would be entrained in the air by the pedestrian

traffic under conditions of normal occupancy. Forced air

equipment, such as a 1 horsepower leaf blower, will be

used to suspend particulate which may be clinging to

walls, ceilings, floors, ledges and other surfaces.

Asbestos fiber concentrations shall not exceed 70

structures / mm2.

4. Air monitoring results shall meet the following:

a. The concentration shall not exceed 0.010 fibers/cc

or 70 structures/mm2.

b. NOTE: This test is required before critical barrier

removal and reconstruction activities may begin. It

shall be sufficient for final air quality monitoring

for building occupancy.

c. If test results show asbestos fiber concentrations

to be greater than allowed, the clean up shall be

repeated until compliance is achieved. Re-clean all

surfaces and operate the HEPA equipped Negative Air

Filtration Units to exhaust air outside the Work

Area to filter the air.

K. Reconstruction





1. After the Work Area is found to be in compliance with

Part H above, (less than 70 structures/mm2) the following

tasks shall be performed by the Contractor:

a. All critical barriers shall be unsealed.

b. All remaining plastic sheeting, tape and any other

debris shall be disposed of in sealed plastic bags

labeled as asbestos contaminated waste.

c. Clothes or sponges used in the cleaning operation


2.8 INSPECTIONS

A. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform the following

inspections:

1. Pre-commencement inspection, which verifies that all

enclosure protection and engineering controls are in

place before actual gross removal of ACM takes place,

will be conducted prior to each phase of work. The

asbestos sampling technician will observe and check

compliance with the following:

a. Critical/separation barriers are in place;

b. Negative air filtration devices are in place and

operational;

c. Notification, variances, permits, placards and

licenses are posted;

d. Waste container is on site and properly labeled;

e. OSHA signs are posted;

f. Emergency plans and numbers are posted;

g. Decontamination meets all requirements and is in

operation;

h. Plastic sheeting is in place

i. Proper and adequate quantities of supplies, such as

suits, respirators and filters, towels, bags and

other equipment;

j. Locked out and tagged out electrical system;

k. Disconnected HVAC system; and,

l. Ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCI’s) are in

place outside the work area and operational;





2. Pre-encapsulation (sealant) inspection, which verifies

that all ACM has been removed and the work area is dust

free before the area, is sprayed with a sealant.

B. The Environmental Consultant will perform the following

inspections:

1. Pre-commencement Inspection.

2. Final clean-up inspection, which verifies that the

enclosure is ready for the collection of the final air

clearance samples. The Contractor is required to notify

the Environmental Consultant and the Owner in writing, 24

hours prior, that a final visual inspection is requested.

No final visual inspection will be conducted unless the

work area is dry and free of any standing moisture or wet

surfaces.

3. During the Final clean-up inspection the Contractor must

have a Licensed Supervisor present.

4. The NJDOL is authorized to conduct unannounced

inspections and periodic inspection during the abatement

project to ensure compliance with all applicable

regulation under their authority.

2.9 DECONTAMINATION FACILITIES AND PROCEDURES

A. The Contractor shall provide an adequate remote

decontamination unit, in proximity to the work area, which

shall be staged in a location arranged with the Facility,

consisting of a serial arrangement of rooms or spaces.

1. Each airlock shall be clearly identified and separated

from the other by polyethylene crossover sheet doors

designed to minimize particulates, fibers/particulates

and air transfer as authorized personnel pass between

each chamber.

2. A minimum of two (2) layers of six (6) mil fire-rated

polyethylene sheeting shall be required for floors,

walls, and the ceiling for constructed decontamination

units. Polyethylene crossover sheet doors shall have at

least three (3) layers of polyethylene sheeting and be

weighted so as to fall into place when people pass

through the area.

3. Decontamination chamber doors shall be of sufficient

height and width to enable replacement of equipment that

may fail and to safely stretcher or carry an injured





worker from the site without destruction of the chamber

or unnecessary risk to the integrity of the work area.

Such doors must be at least four (4) feet wide, and the

distance between sets of doors must be at least four (4)

feet.

4. The decontamination areas shall consist of the following:

a. Clean Room: In this room, authorized personnel

remove and leave all street clothes and put on clean

disposable coveralls. Appropriate NIOSH approved

respiratory protection equipment is also picked up

in this area. No contaminated items are permitted

in this room.

b. Shower Room: This is a separate room used for

transit by cleanly dressed authorized personnel

entering the work area from the clean room and for

showering by them after they have undressed in the

equipment room. This is a contaminated area.

5. Construct airtight walls and ceiling using fire-rated six

(6) mil polyethylene sheeting. Use (2) two layers

(minimum) of six (6) mil polyethylene sheeting to cover

floors in all areas of the Decontamination Units.

6. Fabricate airlock flap doors from three (3) overlapping

sheets with openings a minimum of four (4) feet wide.

Configure so that sheeting overlaps adjacent surfaces.

Weigh sheets at bottoms as required so that they quickly

close after being released. Put arrows on sheets to

indicate direction of overlap and/or travel.

7. Provide a minimum of four (4) feet between entrance and

exit of any room.

B. Decontamination Procedures

1. Where remote decontamination units are utilized, the

Contractor’s personnel shall don two (2) protective

suits.

2. When exiting the work area(s), the first suit shall be

remove and placed in a disposal bag staged at the airlock

entrance to the work area(s). The individuals shall

proceed to the shower room of the decontamination unit,

and remove protective clothing, except respirators.

3. The person then proceeds directly into the shower room.

Respirators shall be taken off last to prevent inhalation

of fibers during removal of contaminated clothing, and





shall not be removed until they have been washed free of

dust.

4. After showering, the person moves to the clean room and

dresses in street clothing prior to exiting. Respirators

are picked up, washed thoroughly, and disinfected as

required, wrapped and stored in the clean room.

5. The Contractor shall ensure that filters in cartridge

type respirators used during the preparation and

abatement phase of the project are removed, wetted, and

discarded as contaminated waste. All new filters shall

be in place in the respirator prior to reuse. For

powered air purifying respirators or supplied air

respirators, the manufacturer's instructions shall be

followed about the proper decontamination sequence.

6. There shall be no smoking, eating, or drinking in any

contaminated areas (shower room, equipment room, and work

area).

7. Respirators shall be worn in all contaminated areas.

8. Non-disposable footwear shall remain inside the

contaminated area until completion of the activity, and

shall be thoroughly cleaned at that time.

9. Decontamination units shall be cleaned on a daily basis,

at the end of each shift.

2.10 EMERGENCY PRECAUTIONS

A. Establish emergency and fire exits from the Work Area. The

clean side of all emergency exits shall be equipped with two

full sets of protective clothing and respirators at all times.

B. Notify local medical emergency personnel, both ambulance crews

and hospital emergency room staff prior to commencement of

abatement operations as to the possibility of having to handle

contaminated or injured workmen, and shall be advised on safe

decontamination.

C. Prepare to administer first aid to injured personnel after

decontamination. Seriously injured personnel shall be treated

immediately or evacuated immediately for decontamination.

When an injury occurs, precautions shall be taken to reduce

airborne fiber concentrations (i.e. misting of the air with

water) until the injured person has been removed from the Work

Area.





D. Notify, before actual removal of the asbestos material, the

local police and fire departments to the danger of entering

the Work Area. Contractor shall make every effort to help

these agencies form plans of action should their personnel

need to enter the contaminated area.

2.11 SUBMITTALS:

A. Before Start of Work submit the following to the Environmental

Consultant for review. Do not begin work until these

submittals are received, reviewed and accepted as is.

1. Material Safety Data Sheet: Submit Material Safety Data

Sheets, or equivalent, in accordance with the OSHA Hazard

Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) for the

following:

a. Surfactants.

b. Encapsulants.

c. Solvents.

2.12 USE OF BUILDING FACILITIES

A. Temporary Facilities: Refer to General Conditions for an

explanation and breakdown of responsibility.

2.13 USE OF THE PREMISES

A. Contractor shall confine his apparatus, the storage of

materials, and supplies, and the operation of his workmen to

limits established by law, ordinances, and the directions of

the Owner and the Environmental Consultant. All flammable or

combustible materials shall be properly stored to obviate fire

and in areas approved by the Facility.

B. Contractor shall assure that no exits from the building are

obstructed, that appropriate safety barriers are established

to prevent access, and that Work Areas are kept neat, clean,

and safe.

C. All surrounding work, fixtures, soil lines, drains, water

lines, gas pipes, electrical conduit, wires, utilities, duct

work railings, shrubbery, landscaping, etc. which are to

remain in place shall be carefully protected and, if disturbed





or damaged, shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the

Environmental Consultant or the Owner, at no additional cost.

D. All routes through the building to be used by the Contractor

shall first be approved by the Environmental Consultant and

the Owner.

E. Attention is specifically drawn to the fact that other

Contractors, performing the work of other Contracts, may be

(or are) brought upon any of the work sites of this Contract.

Therefore, the Contractor shall not have exclusive rights to

any site of his work and shall fully cooperate and coordinate

his work with the work of other Contractors who may be on (or

are on) any site of the work of this Contract.

F. Use of toilet facilities will be as designated by the Owner.

2.14 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. All asbestos waste materials destined for disposal shall be

wetted and packaged in permanently-sealed, leak-tight

containers (such as six-mil plastic bags) appropriately

labeled in accordance with Title 40 CFR 61.150 before it can

be legally transported and disposed of. Labels must indicate

the name of the generator and the location where the waste was

generated as per the NESHAP revision published November 20,

1990, in the Federal Register.

B. The deposition of all asbestos-containing material must be at

waste disposal sites operated in accordance with the

provisions of Title 40 CFR 61.154.

C. Copies of asbestos waste manifests and/or other receipts

issued by the approved dump site must be provided to the Owner

for each load of asbestos-containing material.

D. A notification of intent to dispose of asbestos shall be sent

to the New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection at

least 10 days prior to actual disposal.

E. All asbestos waste materials destined for disposal in New

Jersey shall be wetted and packaged in permanently sealed,

leak-tight containers (such as 6-mil plastic bags, double

bagged with visible labels) in accordance with 40 CFR 61.150

before it can be legally transported and disposed of in New

Jersey. No haulage of loose asbestos is permitted.





F. The notification of D above shall include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of the removal

project.

2. Quantity and nature of the waste to be disposed.

3. Name, address, and New Jersey Department of Environmental

Protection registration number of the collector-handler.

4. Name and address of the landfill at which disposal will

occur.

5. Date and time of disposal.

6. A copy of any written notification required by 40 CFR

61.150.

G. Asbestos waste, which is properly packaged, shall be disposed

of at a landfill, which is registered, by the New Jersey

Department of Environmental Protection in conformance with the

following:

1. The landfill used must be registered by the New Jersey

Department of Environmental Protection to accept Waste ID

#27A as per N.J.A.C. 7:26-2.13(g).

2. The specific landfill facility chosen must be one

designated by the New Jersey Department of Environmental

Protection as the recipient facility for the community in

which the removal project is located.

3. The waste hauler must possess a valid solid waste

transporter registration issued by the New Jersey

Department of Environmental Protection. A licensed solid

waste transporter shall be a commercial collector/hauler

or shall be the removal company if they are so

registered.

4. Asbestos waste can be hauled in dumpster containers

provided the load is comprised only of asbestos in bags

and does not contain any other wastes or asbestos-

containing wastes which could compromise the integrity of

the permanent containers.

5. If rough surfaces or other materials are present in the

load, which could potentially puncture the permanent

containers, then those containers shall be enclosed in

temporary fiber or steel drums during loading, transport,

and unloading operations. In addition, asbestos wastes

shall not be loaded into or hauled with vehicles

containing compactor devices.





6. To determine which landfill to use for a particular

project, N.J.A.C. 7:26-2.13 and the NJDEP Division of

Solid and Hazardous Waste - Guidance Document for the

Management of Asbestos-containing Material (11/2013)

shall be consulted.

7. A certificate of completion shall not be issued by the

asbestos sampling technician until the waste disposal

unit has been removed from the work site.

8. Locations of waste containers must be coordinated with

the Environmental Consultant prior to being dropped by

the waste hauler.

PART 3 - PRODUCTS

3.1 QUALITY

A. Deliver all materials to the job site in their manufacturer's

original container, with the manufacturer's label intact and

legible.

1. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and

labels intact until time of use.

2. Store all materials on pallets, away from any damp and/or

wet surface. Cover materials in order to prevent damage

and/or contamination.

3. Promptly remove damaged materials and unsuitable items

from the job site, and promptly replace with material

meeting the specified requirements, at no additional cost

to the Client.

B. The asbestos safety technician may reject as non-complying

such material and products that do not bear satisfactory

identification as to manufacturer, grade, quality and other

pertinent information.

3.2 MATERIALS

A. Sealing material shall be both penetrating and bridging and

may be applied by a one or two coat system.

B. Framing Materials and Doors: As required to construct

temporary decontamination facilities and Isolation Barriers.





Lumber shall be high grade, new, finished one side and fire

retardant.

C. Fire Retardant Polyethylene Sheeting: minimum uniform

thickness of 6-mil. Provide largest size possible to minimize

seams.

D. Fire Retardant Reinforced Polyethylene Sheeting: For covering

floor of decontamination units, provide translucent, nylon

reinforced or woven polyethylene laminated, fire retardant

polyethylene sheeting. Provide largest size possible to

minimize seams, minimum uniform thickness 6-mil.

E. Drums: Asbestos transporting drums, sealable and clearly

marked with warning labels as required by OSHA and EPA.

F. Polyethylene Disposal Bags: Asbestos disposal bags, minimum of

6-mil thick. Bags shall be clearly marked with warning labels

as required by OSHA and EPA.

G. Signs: Asbestos warning signs for posting at perimeter of Work

Area, as required by OSHA and EPA.

H. Waste Container Bag Liners and Flexible Trailer Trays: One

piece leak-resistant flexible tray with absorbent pad.

I. Tape: Provide tape, which is of high quality with an adhesive,

which is formulated to aggressively stick to sheet

polyethylene.

J. Spray Adhesive: Provide spray adhesive in aerosol cans which

is specifically formulated to stick tenaciously to sheet

polyethylene.

K. Flexible Duct: Spiral reinforced flex duct for air filtration

devices.

3.3 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Air Filtration Device (AFD): AFDs shall be equipped with High

Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filtration systems and shall

be approved by and listed with Underwriter's Laboratory (UL).

B. Scaffolding: All scaffolding shall be designed and constructed

in accordance with OSHA (29 CFR 1926/1910), New Jersey

Building Code, and any other applicable federal, state and

local government regulations. Whenever there is a conflict or





overlap of the above references the most stringent provisions

are applicable. All scaffolding and components shall be

capable of supporting without failure a minimum of four times

the maximum intended load, plus an allowance for impact.

1. Provide non-skid surface on all scaffold surfaces subject

to foot traffic. Scaffold ends and joints shall be

sealed with tape to prevent penetration of asbestos

fibers.

2. Equip rungs of all metal ladders, etc., with an abrasive,

non-slip surface.

C. Transportation Equipment: Transportation Equipment, as

required, shall be suitable for loading, temporary storage,

transit and unloading of contaminated waste without exposure

to persons or property. Any temporary storage containers

positioned outside the building for temporary storage shall be

metal, closed and locked.

D. Vacuum Equipment: All vacuum equipment utilized in the Work

Area shall utilize HEPA filtration systems.

E. Vacuum Attachments: Soft Brush Attachment, Asbestos Scraper

Tool, Drill Dust Control Kit.

F. Electric Sprayer: An electric airless sprayer suitable for

application of encapsulating material and shall be approved by

and listed with Underwriters Laboratory.

G. Water Sprayer: The water sprayer shall be an airless or other

low-pressure sprayer for amended water application.

H. Water Atomizer: Powered air-misting device equipped with a

ground fault interrupter and equipped to operate continuously.

I. Brushes: All brushes shall have nylon bristles. Wire brushes

are excluded from use due to their potential to shred asbestos

fibers into small, fine fibers.

J. Hand Power Tools: shall be equipped with HEPA-filtered local

exhaust ventilation if used to drill, cut into or otherwise

disturb ACM.

K. Other Tools and Equipment: Contractor shall provide other

suitable tools for the stripping, removal, encapsulation, and

disposal activities including but not limited to: hand-held

scrapers, sponges, rounded-edge shovels, brooms, and carts.





L. Fire Extinguishers: Provide type “A” fire extinguishers for

temporary offices and similar spaces where there is minimal

danger of electrical or grease-oil-flammable liquid fires. In

other areas, provide type “ABC” dry chemical extinguishers of

NFPA recommended types for the exposure in each case. All

fire extinguishers shall comply with the applicable

recommendations of NFPA Standard 10, “Standard for Portable

Extinguishers.” Provide a minimum of four fire extinguishers

in each Work Area; one in the equipment room of the

decontamination unit, one outside the Work Area in the clean

room or directly outside same, and two fire extinguishers

where they are most effective for their intended purpose. Do

not exceed seventy-five feet between fire extinguishers within

the Work Area.

M. First Aid Kits: Contractor shall maintain adequately stocked

first aid kits in the clean rooms of the decontamination units

and within Work Areas. The first aid kit shall be approved by

a licensed physician for the work to be performed under this

Contract.

N. Water Service:

1. Water is available at the facility

2. Temporary Water Service Connection: Valves shall be

temperature and pressure rated for operation of the

temperature and pressures encountered. After completion

of use, connections and fittings shall be removed without

damage or alteration to existing water piping, and

equipment. Leaking or dripping fittings/valves shall be

repaired and or replaced as required.

3. Water Hoses: Employ new heavy-duty abrasion-resistant

hoses with a pressure rating greater than the maximum

pressure of the water distribution system to provide

water into each Work Area and to each Decontamination

Enclosure Unit. Provide fittings as required for

connection to existing wall hydrants or spouts, as well

as temporary water heating equipment, branch piping,

showers shut-off nozzles and equipment.

4. Water Heater: Provide UL rated 40-gallon electric water

heaters to supply hot water for Personal Decontamination

Enclosure System Shower. Activate from 30 Amp Circuit

breakers located within the Decontamination Enclosure

subpanel. Provide relief valve compatible with water

heater operations, pipe relief valve down to drip pan at

floor level with type `L' copper piping. Drip pans shall





be 6-inch deep and securely fastened to water heater.

Wiring of the water heater shall comply with NEMA, NECA,

and UL standards.

O. Electrical Service:

1. General: Comply with applicable NEMA, NECA and UL

standards and governing regulations for materials and

layout of temporary electric service.

2. Refer to the General Conditions for temporary electric

service requirements.

3. Temporary Power: Provide service to decontamination unit

subpanel with minimum 100 AMP, two pole circuit breaker

or fused disconnect connected to the building's main

distribution panel. Subpanel and disconnect shall be

sized and equipped to accommodate all electrical

equipment required for completion of the work.

4. Voltage Differences: Provide identification warning signs

at power outlets that are other than 110-120 volt power.

Provide polarized outlets for plug-in type outlets, to

prevent insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher

voltage outlets. Dry type transformers shall be provided

where required to provide voltages necessary for work

operations.

5. Ground Fault Protection: Equip all circuits for any

purpose entering Work Area with ground fault circuit

interrupters (GFCI). Locate GFCIs exterior to Work Area

so that all circuits are protected prior to entry to Work

Area. Provide circuit breaker type ground fault circuit

interrupters (GFCI) equipped with test button and reset

switch for all circuits to be used for any purpose in

Work Area, decontamination units, exterior, or as

otherwise required by NEC, OSHA or other authority.

Locate in panel exterior to Work Area.

6. Power Distribution System: Provide circuits of adequate

size and proper characteristics for each use. In general

run wiring overhead, and rise vertically where wiring

will be least subject to damage from operations.

7. Temporary Wiring: In the Work Area shall be type UF non-

metallic sheathed cable located overhead and exposed for

surveillance. Provide liquid tight enclosures or boxes

for all wiring devices. Do not wire temporary lighting

with plain, exposed (insulated) electrical conductors.





8. Electrical Power Cords: Use only grounded extension

cords; use hard service cords where exposed to traffic

and abrasion. Use single lengths of cords only.

9. Temporary Lighting: All lighting within the Work Area

shall be liquid and moisture proof and designed for the

use intended.

a. Provide sufficient temporary lighting to ensure

proper workmanship everywhere; by combined use of

daylight, general lighting, and portable plug-in

task lighting.

b. Provide lighting in the Decontamination Unit as

required supplying a minimum 50-foot candle light

level.




ASBESTOS ABATEMENT IN OCCUPIED BUILDINGS 028214- 1

SECTION 028214 – ABATEMENT OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS IN

OCCUPIED BUILDING IN ACCORDANCE WITH NJAC 5-23:8

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:


General and Supplementary Conditions, Architectural Drawings

and Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. An

asbestos inspection report has been prepared and provided to

the Owner for the work identified in this specification.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this

specification to the extent referenced. The publications

referred to within the text will be the basic designation

only.

29 CFR 1910.134 Respiratory Protection

29 CFR 1910.146 Confined Spaces

29 CFR 1910.1200 Hazard Communication

29 CFR 1926.1101 OSHA Asbestos

29 CFR 1926.55 Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, and Mists

29 CFR 1926.59 Hazard Communication

29 CFR 1926.62 Lead in Construction

29 CFR 1926.103 Respiratory Protection

40 CFR 763 AHERA

40 CFR 61 Subpart M NESHAP

40 CFR 260 Hazardous Waste Management Systems:

General

40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of

Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 262 Generators of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 263 Transporters of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 264

Owners and Operators of Hazardous

Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal

facilities

40 CFR 265

Owners and Operators of Hazardous

Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal

facilities

49 CFR 171 Standard for Transportation of

Hazardous Materials.




49 CFR 172 Hazardous Material Tables and

Hazardous Materials Communications

Regulations

49 CFR 173 General Requirements for Shipments and

Packaging

49 CFR 178 Shipping Container Specifications

NEW JERSEY REGULATIONS

N.J.A.C.5:23 - (8.1-

8.22)

Asbestos Hazard Abatement Sub-code

N.J.S.A. 34:5A-32 et

seq.

Asbestos Control and Licensing Act

N.J.A.C. 12:120 Asbestos Licenses and Permits

1.3 NOTIFICATIONS

A. The Contractor shall notify the following agencies in writing

10 days prior to the start of the asbestos removal project:

1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency-Region II National Emissions Standards for Hazardous

Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) Coordinator

26 Federal Plaza, Room 1033

New York, New York 10278

2. State of New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection Division of Solid Waste Management

P.O. Box 414

Trenton, New Jersey 08625

3. N.J. Department of Health Asbestos Control Service

P.O. Box 369


4. NJDOL & Work Force Development Asbestos Control & Licensing

PO Box 949


5. N.J. Department of Community Affairs Bureau of Construction Code Enforcement

Asbestos Safety Unit

CN 816





With copies to:

Brinkerhoff Environmental Services, Inc.

1805 Atlantic Avenue

Manasquan, New Jersey 08736

B. Notification to the agencies in Subpart A above shall be

submitted on the required forms and include the following

information (Title 40 CFR 61.146):

1. Name and address of Owner of building.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Address and description of the building, including size,

age and prior use of the facility or area. Estimate of the

approximate amount of friable asbestos material present in

square feet and/or linear feet, as applies. Designate room

numbers or other location information.

4. Scheduled starting and completion dates for removal.

5. Procedures and equipment (including ventilating system)

that will be employed to comply with Title 40 CFR Part 61.

National Emission Standard for Asbestos, and with Title 29

CFR 1926.58.

6. The name and address of the monitoring firm to perform air monitoring on behalf of the Contractor's employees.

7. The name and address of the Department of Environmental

Protection registered waste hauler and the landfill where

the waste will be deposited. The landfill should also com-

ply with 40 CFR Part 61.

C. The Contractor shall provide the Owner’s Asbestos Safety

Control Monitor (ASCM) with all necessary documents and

information required to obtain a construction permit for

asbestos abatement from the New Jersey Department of Community

Affairs.

D. The building owner shall notify the building occupants in

writing 20 business days prior to the commencement of the

abatement project. The notification shall include precedures

and precautions deemed necessary in order to protect the

health, safety, and welfare of the occupants. The

notification shall include relocation plans, modifications to

emergency egress routs, and contact information for the




appropriate owners representative. This notification shall be

posted seven (7) days prior to the start of work area

preparation in conspicuous locations, and shall remain posted

throughout the project.

E. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s ASCM in writing at

least 48 hours prior to start of any preparation work.

F. The ASCM shall notify the New Jersey Department of Community

Affairs, Asbestos Unit 10 days prior to the commencement of

the abatement project, 48 hours prior to the start of

preparation for each new work area.

G. The Asbestos Safety Technician shall notify the New Jersey

Department of Community Affairs via telephone notification on

the first day of the project and as required for inspections.

1.4 DOCUMENTATION

A. The Contractor shall provide the following documentation in

writing before the start of the abatement project:

1. His name, address, and license number pursuant to the As-bestos Licenses and Permits under the jurisdiction of the

New Jersey Department of Labor.

2. The name, address, and EPA registration certificate of the New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection regis-

tered waste hauler and of the New Jersey Department of En-

vironmental Protection registered landfill where the asbes-

tos waste will be deposited.

3. The name and address of the Contractor's air monitoring

firm successfully participating in the National Institute

for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) PAT program, in-

cluding the latest result sheet indicating PAT proficiency.

4. A list of workers with valid New Jersey Asbestos Removal Permits which will be involved with this project.

5. A copy of the construction permit for asbestos abatement issued by the Administrative Authority having jurisdiction.

6. Documentation that he is familiar with the Occupational

Safety and Health Administration (OSHA); and the U.S. Envi-

ronmental Protection Agency (EPA) relating to the applica-

tion, removal, disposal and treatment of asbestos.




a. OSHA Safety and Health Standards, namely Title 29 CFR

1926, Section 1926.58. Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyl-

lite and Actinolite and 29 CFR 1910.34, Respiratory Pro-

tection and 29 CFR 1910.20, Access to Employee Exposure &

Medical Records.

b. EPA Regulations, namely: Subpart M, Title 40 CFR Part 61, National Emission Standard for Asbestos, Sections 61.140

through 61.156, Effective April 5, 1984.

B. Documentation that employees have received medical

examinations, which are required by OSHA Title 29 CFR 1926.58.

This documentation shall consist of the name and address of

the physician performing the exam(s); the name(s) of the

employee(s) and the date(s) of the exam(s).

C. The Contractor shall submit in writing the following

documentation:

1. A written copy of the Letters of Notification required by Part 1.3, Subpart B, including items 1 through 7.

2. A written plan for preparation of the work site including delineation of all work areas, number and location of nega-

tive air machines, and the location of all decontamination

units.

3. A written description of the types and quantities of pro-tective clothing and approved respirators to be used.

4. A written delineation of work site isolation; e.g., barrier construction, signs, security.

5. A written description of all removal methods to be used in-cluding description of types and numbers of negative air

filtration units.

6. A written description of the tools and methods to be used for clean-up, reconstruction and waste disposal.

D. Safety Data Sheet: Submit the GHS Compliant Safety Data

Sheet, or equivalent, in accordance with the OSHA Hazard

Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) for each surfactant

and encapsulation material proposed for use at the work site.

Include a separate attachment for each sheet indicating the

specific worker protection equipment proposed for use with the

material indicated.




E. Deliver materials to the job site in original, new and

unopened packages and containers bearing the manufacturer’s

name and label, and the following information:

1. Name or title of material

2. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture.

3. Manufacturer’s name

4. Thinning instructions

5. Application instructions

1.5 AIR MONITORING AND INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with all aspects of the

air-monitoring program, which is conducted by an independent

air-monitoring firm (ASCM) responsible to the Owner.

B. In addition to the ASCM hired by the Owner, the Contractor

shall arrange for air monitoring to be conducted in all Work

Areas in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101 of OSHA regulations,

on behalf of the Contractor's employees. The Testing

Laboratory employed by the Contractor shall participate and

show proficiency in the NIOSH (National Institute for

Occupational Safety Health) PAT (Proficiency Analytical

Testing) program for airborne asbestos.

C. Personal samples shall be obtained from employees engaged in

each of the following operations; asbestos removal (i.e.

spraying, scraping and brushing), disposal (i.e. bagging) and

clean up. Representative sampling shall be repeated in the

event of major changes in the removal operation. This

sampling shall be done with the sampling media and flow rates

specified in the OSHA Reference (Method 7400 “A” rules).

Samples shall be taken for the determination of the 8-hour

time weighted average airborne concentration and of the

ceiling concentrations of asbestos fibers.

D. The results of the Contractor's air monitoring tests (Subpart

B and C above) shall be returned within 24 hours; copies shall

be provided to each employee monitored as specified by OSHA

Regulation 29 CFR 1910.20. The Contractor shall examine these

results and evaluate the effectiveness of the controls in use

(wet methods, exhaust units and respiratory protection).

Copies of these monitoring tests shall be provided to the




Owner's Asbestos Safety Technician. Copies shall also be made

available upon request to representatives of Local, State, or

Federal enforcement agencies.

E. The Owner’s Asbestos Safety Technician will conduct air

monitoring and visual inspections in, and adjacent to, the

Work Area on behalf of the Owner throughout the abatement

project.

F. The Testing Laboratory shall conduct all required analyses

expeditiously and in conformance with N.J.A.C. 5:23-8 and

shall report the results of such tests to the Asbestos Safety

Technician. The Asbestos Safety Technician, upon receipt of

testing results indicating that concentrations above 0.01

fibers/cc have occurred outside the containment barriers or

within the clean room of the decontamination chamber during

the abatement action, shall report these results to the

Owner's Contractor and ASCM Firm, so that prompt corrective

action may be taken.

G. If air samples collected outside of the work area during

abatement activities indicate airborne fiber concentrations

greater than original background levels or greater than the

0.01 fibers/cc as determined by Phase Contrast Microscopy,

whichever is larger, work shall stop for inspection, and the

integrity of barriers shall be restored. Clean-up of surfaces

outside of the work area using HEPA vacuums or wet cleaning

techniques shall be done at the direction of the Asbestos

Safety Technician prior to resuming abatement activities and

at the cost of the Contractor.

H. The Asbestos Safety Technician shall keep a daily log of

on-site observations concerning Contractor's compliance with

activities required under these job specifications. This log

shall be made available upon request at all times to the

Owner, ASCM Firm, and appropriate Local, State and Federal

agencies. The Asbestos Safety Technician shall report results

in a comprehensive final report.

I. Maximum Airborne Asbestos Concentrations

Sample Type Asbestos Concentration Method

Progress sample outside the

work area during removal. 0.01 fibers/cc PCM

Post Abatement inside the

work site. <70 structures/mm2 TEM

PCM = Phase Contrast Microscopy




TEM = Transmission Electron Microscopy

1.6 DEFINITIONS

The following words, terms, and abbreviations, when used within

this document shall have the following meanings unless the

context clearly indicates otherwise.

1. Abatement: Procedures physically taken to control or elimi-

nate fiber release from asbestos-containing building mate-

rials. This includes removal, encapsulation, enclosure, and

repair.

2. Aggressive Sampling: Method of sampling in which the indi-

vidual collecting the air sample creates activity by the

use of mechanical equipment during the sampling period to

stir up settled dust and simulate activity in that area of

the building.

3. AIHA: American Industrial Hygiene Association.

4. Airlock: System for permitting entrance and exit while re-

stricting air movement between a contaminated area and an

uncontaminated area. It consists of two curtained doorways

separated by a distance of at least three feet such that

one passes through one doorway into the airlock, allowing

the doorway sheeting to overlap and close off the opening

before proceeding through the second doorway, thereby pre-

venting flow-through contamination.

5. Air Sampling: Process of measuring the fiber content of a

known volume of air collected during a specific period. The

procedure utilized for asbestos follows the NIOSH Standard

Analytical Method 7400, or the provisional transmission

electron microscopy methods developed by the US EPA, which

are utilized for lower detection levels and specific fiber

identification.

6. Amended Water: Water to which a surfactant has been added.

7. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

8. Area Air Sampling: Any form of air sampling or monitoring

where the sampling device is placed at some stationary lo-

cation.




9. Asbestos: Any hydrated mineral silicate separable into com-

mercially usable fibers, including but not limited to

chrysotile (serpentine), amosite (cumingtonite-grunerite),

crocidolite (riebeckite), tremolite, anthophyllite and ac-

tinolite.

10. Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM): Asbestos or any materi-al containing more than one-percent asbestos.

11. Asbestos-Containing Waste Material: ACM or asbes-

tos-contaminated objects requiring disposal.

12. Asbestos Handler: Individual, who disturbs, removes, re-

pairs, or encloses friable asbestos material. This individ-

ual shall have completed approved training course(s) and be

in possession of certification issued by NJDOL.

13. Asbestos Handler Supervisor: Individual who supervises the handlers during an asbestos project and ensures that proper

asbestos abatement procedures as well as individual safety

procedures are being adhered to. This individual shall have

completed approved training course(s) and be in possession

of certification issued by NJDOL.

14. Asbestos Handling Certificate: Certificate(s) issued to in-dividuals who have met the criteria established by NJDOL.

15. Asbestos Inspection Report: A report on the condition of a building or structure in relation to the presence and con-

dition of asbestos therein.

16. Asbestos Project: Any form of work performed in connection with the alteration, innovation, modification, or demoli-

tion of a building or structure which will disturb (e.g.

remove, enclose, encapsulate) more than three linear feet

or more than three square feet of friable ACM.

17. Asbestos Safety Control Monitoring (ASCM) Firm: The Owners air monitoring firm, certified by the New Jersey Department

of Community Affairs, and hired by the Owner to provide a

certified New Jersey Asbestos Safety Technician, conduct

sample collection and analysis, and personnel to continu-

ously monitor the abatement activities under this contract.

18. Asbestos Safety Technician (AST): A person certified by the New Jersey Department of Community Affairs and hired by the

ASCM Firm to continuously monitor and inspect the asbestos

abatement work pursuant to N.J.A.C. 5:23-8 and these speci-




fications.

19. Authorized Visitor: Building Owner and his/her representa-tive, and any representative of a regulatory or other agen-

cy having jurisdiction over the project.

20. Barrier: Polyethylene sheeting that completely seals off

the work area to prevent contamination of the surrounding

area.

21. Building Owner: Person in whom legal title to the premises is vested unless the premises are held in land trust, in

which instance Building Owner means the person in whom ben-

eficial title is vested.

22. Clean Room: An uncontaminated area or room that is part of worker decontamination enclosure system with provisions for

storage of workers' street clothes and protective equip-

ment.

23. Clearance Air Monitoring: Employment of aggressive sampling techniques with a volume of air collected to determine the

airborne concentration of residual fibers and shall be per-

formed as the final abatement activity.

24. Construction Permit for Asbestos Abatement: A required per-mit provided by the jurisdictional Buildings Department for

the approval to commence any asbestos hazard abatement.

25. Contractor: The asbestos removal contractor.

26. Critical Barrier: Two (2) layers of six (6) –mil polyeth-ylene sheeting that completely seals off the work area to

prevent the distribution of fibers to the surrounding area,

such as the opening between the top of non-movable lights,

HVAC systems, windows, doors, ducts, grills, electrical

outlets, floor drains, sinks, etc.

27. Curtained Doorway: Device that consists of at least three overlapping sheets of polyethylene over an existing or tem-

porarily framed doorway. One sheet shall be secured at the

top and left side, the second sheet at the top and right

side, and the third sheet at the top and left side. All

sheets shall have weights attached to the bottom to ensure

that the sheets hang straight and maintain a seal over the

doorway when not in use.

28. Decontamination Enclosure System: Series of connected




rooms, separated from the Work Area and from each other by

air locks, for the decontamination of workers, materials,

waste containers, and equipment.

29. Employee: An asbestos abatement worker having proper train-ing, instruction and licensing.

30. Encapsulant (sealant) or Encapsulating Agent: Liquid mate-rial which can be applied to ACM and which temporarily con-

trols the possible release of asbestos fibers from the ma-

terial either by creating a membrane over the surface

(bridging encapsulant) or by penetrating into the material

and binding its components together (penetrating encapsul-

ant). This may also be used to seal surfaces from which ACM

has been removed.

31. Encapsulation: Coating or spraying of ACM with a sealant.

32. Enclosure: Construction of airtight walls and/or ceilings between ACM and the facility environment, or around surfac-

es coated with ACM, or any other appropriate procedure as

determined by the Department of Community Affairs, which

prevents the release of asbestos fibers.

33. EPA or USEPA: United States Environmental Protection Agen-cy.

34. Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System: A three-stage

decontamination enclosure system for materials and equip-

ment, typically consisting of a designated area of the work

area, a washroom, and an uncontaminated area.

35. Equipment Room: Contaminated area or room that is part of the worker decontamination enclosure system with provisions

for the storage of contaminated clothing and equipment.

36. Fixed Object: Unit of equipment or furniture in the Work Area that cannot be removed from the Work Area.

37. Friable Asbestos Material: Asbestos or any ACM that can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder when dry, by

hand or other mechanical pressure.

38. Glove-Bag Technique: Method for removing friable ACM from heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) ducts,

short piping runs, valves, joints, elbows, and other non-

planar surfaces in a non-contained Work Area. The glove-bag

assembly is a manufactured device consisting of a glove-bag




(constructed of at least 6-mil transparent polyethylene),

two inward-projecting long sleeve gloves, one in-

ward-projecting water wand sleeve, an internal tool pouch,

and an attached, labeled receptacle for asbestos waste. The

glove-bag is constructed and installed in such a manner

that it surrounds the object or area to be decontaminated

and contains all asbestos fibers released during the remov-

al process.

39. HEPA-Filter: High efficiency particulate air filter capable of trapping and retaining 99.97 percent of particles (as-

bestos fibers) greater than 0.3 micrometers mass median

aerodynamic equivalent diameter.

40. HEPA Vacuum: A vacuum cleaner equipped with a HEPA filter.

41. Holding Area: Chamber in the equipment decontamination en-closure located between the washroom and an uncontaminated

area.

42. Movable Object: Unit of equipment or furniture in the Work Area that can be removed from the Work Area.

43. Negative Air Pressure Equipment: Portable local exhaust

system equipped with HEPA filtration. The system shall be

capable of creating a negative pressure differential be-

tween the outside and inside of the Work Area.

44. NESHAP: National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pol-lutants.

45. NIOSH: National Institute for Occupational Safety and

Health.

46. NJDCA: New Jersey Department of Community Affairs

47. NJDOL: New Jersey Department of Labor.

48. NJDEP: New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection

49. Occupied Area: Area of the work site where abatement is not taking place and where personnel or occupants normally

function or where workers are not required to use personal

protective equipment.

50. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

51. PCB Ballast: Polychlorinated biphenyl containing fluores-




cent light fixture ballast.

52. Personal Air Monitoring: Method used to determine employ-ees' exposure to airborne fibers. The sample is collected

outside the respirator in the worker's breathing zone.

53. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): Appropriate protective clothing, gloves, eye protection, footwear, and head gear.

54. Plastic Sheeting: Polyethylene sheeting of a certain thick-ness as indicated.

55. Plasticize: Cover floors and walls with polyethylene sheet-ing as herein specified as acceptable to the New Jersey De-

partment of Community Affairs.

56. Qualitative Fit Test: Individual test subject's responding (either voluntarily or involuntarily) to a chemical chal-

lenge outside the respirator face-piece. Three of the most

popular methods include: 1) irritant smoke test; 2) odorous

vapor test; and 3) taste test.

57. Quantitative Fit Test: Exposing the respiratory wearer to a test atmosphere containing an easily detectable, nontoxic

aerosol, vapor or gas as the test agent. Instrumentation,

which samples the test atmosphere and the air inside the

face-piece of the respirator, is used to measure quantita-

tively the leakage into the respirator. There are a number

of test atmospheres, test agents, and exercises to perform

during the test.

58. Removal: Stripping of any asbestos- containing materials

from surfaces or components of a facility or taking out

structural components in accordance with 40 CFR 61 Subparts

A and M.

59. Repair: Corrective action using recommended work practices to minimize the likelihood of fiber release from small dam-

aged areas of ACM.

60. Separation (Isolation) Barrier: A constructed wall (2” x 4” studs, spaced 16” on center, constructed with 1/2” plywood

and caulked seams) that separates the clean area from the

work area having a fire rating, if applicable, and does not

interfere with the means of egress. Polyethylene sheeting

(minimum 2 layers of 6 mil) shall be placed on both sides

of the barrier so that it completely seals off the work ar-

ea to prevent the distribution of fibers to the surrounding




area.

61. Shower Room: Room between the clean room and the equipment room in the worker decontamination enclosure with hot and

cold running water controllable at the tap and arranged for

complete showering during decontamination.

62. Surfactant: Chemical wetting agent added to water to im-prove penetration.

63. Visible Emissions: Emissions containing particulate materi-al that are visually detectable without the aid of instru-

ments.

64. Washroom: Room between the Work Area and the holding area in the equipment decontamination enclosure system where

equipment and waste containers are wet cleaned and/or HEPA-

vacuumed prior to disposal.

65. Wet Cleaning: Removal of asbestos fibers from building sur-faces and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning

tools which have been dampened with amended water.

66. Work Area: Designated rooms, spaces, or areas of the build-ing or structure where asbestos abatement activities

take(s) place.

67. Worker Decontamination Enclosure System: Portion of a de-contamination enclosure system designed for controlled pas-

sage of workers and authorized visitors, consisting of a

clean room, a shower room, and an equipment room separated

from each other and from the Work Area by airlocks and cur-

tained doorways.

68. Work Site: Premises where abatement activity is being per-formed. May be composed of one or more Work Areas.

1.7 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS AND TRAINING

A. All of the Contractor’s workers must have valid training, a

minimum of one (1) years’ experience in asbestos abatement, of

which six (6) months must have been performed within the State

of New Jersey. Each worker must possess a valid and current

asbestos worker’s permit as issued by the State of New Jersey,

and shall comply with all applicable requirements of N.J.S.A.

34:5A-32 and 29 CFR 1926.58 (k)(3), as well as other non-

training requirements of 29 CFR 1926.




B. The Contractor shall furnish proof that all of the Contractors

personnel on site have been given medical examinations as

required by 29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926. As a minimum, the

examination should include a medical history with specific

reference to respiratory disease and a pulmonary function

test. Additionally a chest roentgenogram shall have been

performed in the last five years. This information should be

provided after Notice to Proceed (NTP) and prior to the pre-

construction meeting.

C. The Contractor shall provide a Certified, New Jersey Asbestos

Supervisor to the project with a minimum of two (2) years of

experience in asbestos abatement within the State of New

Jersey. The experience should be at a minimum equivalent in

size and scope as to this project. The Contractor shall

submit a copy of the Supervisors qualifications to the Owner.

1.8 ASBESTOS CONSULTANT/ASBESTOS SAFETY TECHNICIAN

This section is provided only as information to the Asbestos

Removal Contractor. This work shall be in addition to, and

independent of, the OSHA mandated air monitoring conducted on

behalf of the Contractor's employees. (Note: The word

"Contractor", wherever used herein, refers to the Asbestos

Removal Contractor).

Site supervision, air monitoring, and laboratory analysis will

be conducted by the Owner's ASCM firm. The ASCM’s Asbestos

Safety Technician shall have specific training in asbestos

sampling and analytical techniques as recommended by EPA, OSHA

and any other State or Local requirements.

A. General Duties

1. The Asbestos Safety Technician shall perform all air

sampling specified herein and shall be thoroughly

familiar with the Asbestos Removal Specifications.

Acting on behalf of the Owner, the Asbestos Safety

Technician shall have access to all areas of the Asbestos

Removal Project at all times and shall inspect and

monitor the performance of the Contractor to verify that

said performance meets all Federal, State and City

regulations and is in compliance with the Asbestos

Abatement Specifications. The Asbestos Safety Technician

shall be on site during the entire abatement project.




B. Authority & Compliance Responsibilities

1. The Asbestos Safety Technician shall have the authority

to direct the actions of the Contractor verbally and in

writing to assure compliance. In the event of continual

noncompliance or serious violation, the Asbestos Safety

Technician shall notify the ASCM, Owner, and, as

necessary, the appropriate governmental agency. All

directions to the Contractor shall be legible, dated, and

shall bear the signature of the Asbestos Safety

Technician. Copies shall be forwarded immediately to the

Owner.

C. Reporting of Air Sampling and Analysis Data

1. The Testing Laboratory shall conduct all required

analyses within the time frame specified and in

conformance with specified analytical procedures and

shall report the results of such tests to the Asbestos

Safety Technician. The Asbestos Safety Technician, upon

receipt of testing results indicating that concentrations

above 0.010 fibers per cc have occurred outside the

containment barriers or within the clean room during the

abatement action, shall report these results immediately

verbally or by telephonic communication, if necessary, to

the Contractor and Owner so that prompt corrective action

may be taken. This verbal communication shall be

followed by a written report.

2. The Asbestos Safety Technician shall keep a daily log of

on-site observations concerning Contractor's compliance

with activities required under the job Specifications.

This log shall be made available upon request at all

times to the Owner and to the appropriate Local, State

and Federal agencies. The Asbestos Safety Technician

shall report results in a comprehensive final report,

including daily logs, observations and air monitoring

results simultaneously to the Owner and the Contractor

within 30 working days following final testing for re-

occupancy.

D. Removal Phase

Provide monitoring throughout Removal Operations to ensure

that no outside contamination is occurring and to check fiber

levels within the work area. All work is to be conducted

under occupied conditions as defined by the New Jersey

Department of Community Affairs, Asbestos and Lead Unit.





shall be assembled as specified in NIOSH #7400. The flow

rate shall be sufficient within the method limitations to

capture a minimum volume of 560 liters per sample. Pumps

shall be calibrated before and after sampling and a


2. Sampling Frequency & Location:

a. Air samples shall be collected at the beginning of

each work shift and every four hours thereafter.

Samples shall encompass the end of the work shift.

b. Air samples shall be collected at a minimum of one

sample in the clean room of each decontamination

unit and a minimum of two (2) samples from adjacent

areas outside each containment, with preference of

location given to rooms adjacent to critical

barriers and/or the work area with a minimum of one

(1) sample for every 10,000 square feet of occupied

space adjacent to the work area.

c. In addition, samples shall be taken outside the

exhaust location, at entrances to the work area, and

from any interior space from which make up air is

drawn, and from areas such as stairwells, elevators,

and plenums which pass through the work area and are

in service.

3. Sample Analysis: The work in progress air samples shall

be analyzed by NIOSH Method 7400 Rules and shall be

analyzed within four hours from the start of the sample

collection by an analyst listed in the Asbestos Analyst

Registry of the American Industrial Hygiene Association.

Ten percent of the abatement samples shall be re-analyzed

for quality control purposes within 24 hours by a

laboratory as defined by NJAC 5-23:8.

4. Daily occupancy shall be allowed when the results of all

the air samples collected are less than or equal to 0.010

fibers/cc by Phase Contrast Microscopy.

5. If air levels exceed 0.010 f/cc outside the work area or

0.020 f/cc in the clean room of the decontamination unit,

the Asbestos Safety Technician shall implement the

Contingency Plan.

6. Pressure monitoring of work area.

a. Pressure differential shall be monitored by digital

manometers, provided by the Contractor, with




continuous printout. Sensor tubes used for

monitoring shall be placed so that the air

filtration devices shall not cause false readings.

b. One or more separate digital pressure monitoring

systems with continuous printout shall be provided

by the Contractor and installed near the entrance(s)

to each work area and between the work area and any

interior spaces from which make-up air is drawn.

c. The Asbestos Safety Technician shall zero and

calibrate the manometer at a minimum of every 4

hours. The Asbestos Safety Technician shall initial

the manometer tape for all manometer checks.

d. Written documentation of pressure differential shall

be provided to the Asbestos Safety Technician by

continuous printout from the installed monitoring

device. The Asbestos Safety Technician and the

contractor supervisor will ensure, prior to the

completion of the work shift, the integrity of the

containment site before workers depart.

e. The pressure differential shall be greater than or

equal to 0.05 inches w.c. for occupied buildings at

the pre-commencement inspection (at the time of

approval immediately prior to the start abatement

work).

f. In addition to providing a pressure differential

greater than or equal to 0.05 inches w.c. as

required for the pre-commencement inspection, a

smoke test shall be conducted to demonstrate that

the work area has been isolated properly and that

pressure differentials have been established to

prevent fiber migration from the work area.

g. If the air pressure differential drops below 0.05

inches w.c., the Asbestos Safety Technician and the

Contractor Supervisor shall investigate and evaluate

the engineering controls to determine the source of

the pressure loss.

h. If the pressure differential drops below 0.01 inches

w.c. the Asbestos Safety Technician shall implement

the Contingency Plan. The Asbestos Safety

Technician can institute additional requirements, if

necessary, as they see fit for the protection of

building occupants.




7. Record Keeping: Record in a daily log all on-site

observations and required activities of the removal

specification and quality assurance program, (such as

smoke tests and negative air filtration unit pressure

gauge readings.)

E. Post Removal Test

Provide monitoring of the Work Area(s) during clean up, within

48 hours of final cleaning, and before removal of critical

barriers. This test is required to establish safe conditions

for removal of critical barriers and to permit reconstruction

activity to begin. Sufficient time following clean-up

activities shall be allowed so that all surfaces are dry

during monitoring.


shall be assembled as specified in (EPA 560/5-89-001)

Guidelines for Conducting the AHERA TEM Clearance Test to

Determine Completion of an Asbestos Abatement Project.

Pumps shall be calibrated before and after sampling and a


2. Sampling Frequency & Location: Take at least five

representative samples of each Work Area where asbestos-

containing materials have been removed. Five samples

outside the worker area and three field blanks.

3. Analysis: Transmission Electron Microscopy.

4. Time for Laboratory Analysis: Maximum turnaround time

upon completion of sample is seventy-two (72) hours after

submission of samples to the laboratory.

5. Evaluation Criteria: If test results exceed the

applicable clearance criteria, the Asbestos Safety

Technician shall inform the Contractor and the Owner. The

Contractor shall be required to re-clean all surfaces

using wet cleaning methods and provide negative HEPA

filtered exhaust air during the re-cleaning process.

This process of re-cleaning, allowing surfaces to dry and

retesting shall be repeated until compliance is achieved.

6. Certificate of Completion: When the evaluation criteria

are met, the Owner shall receive a Certificate of

Completion from the Asbestos Safety Technician.

F. Submission of Final Report

1. Upon completion of all asbestos removal work and of all

tests, the Asbestos Safety Technician shall submit a




written Final Report to the Owner, including copies of

all backup records documenting the day-by-day progress of

work and related tests. This report shall be presented

in logical form, neatly bound, and properly titled, dated

and signed. Any deviations from acceptable practice on

the part of the Contractor, and any unsatisfactory test

results reported during the course of the job, shall be

highlighted in the Report for record purpose

PART 2 - SCOPE OF WORK

2.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This asbestos abatement project includes the removal of

asbestos containing generator exhaust pipe insulation and

multiple tank insulation(s). This work is being conducted to

facilitate the Forcina Hall HVAC and Roof Replacement Project.

B. All friable asbestos abatement will be performed in accordance

with New Jersey Administrative Code 5:23-8.

C. Where painted surfaces in the project scope are lead-based

paint, work shall be performed in accordance with OSHA

1926.62.

D. Remove all identified, assumed and/or contaminated asbestos-

containing materials in accordance with the project documents.

This asbestos abatement project will involve the removal of

the materials identified on drawings HZ-1 through HZ-6 and as

identified below. The following lists of materials are to be

abated by the asbestos abatement contractor. All materials

will be abated in accordance with N.J.A.C. 5:23-8.

Note: Non-friable materials are included in this specification

due to their location within the Subchapter 8 Work Area.

Location Material Est. Quantity

Basement Mechanical Room Tank Insulation 300 SF





Basement Mechanical Room Exhaust Pipe Wrap 60 LF

Basement Mechanical Room Gaskets 90 Pieces

Basement Mechanical Room Black Pipe Sealant 5 SF




2.2 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Owner will not occupy any portion of the work area during

the entire asbestos removal project including completion of

the reconstruction.

2.3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Prospective bidders should bid this project according to what

is observed during the pre-bid walkthrough and enclosed

herein.


exact quantities and locations of all materials. The

quantities provided herein are for informational purposes

only. The Owner and Brinkerhoff Environmental, Inc. assume no

responsibility for their accuracy, the accuracy of quantities

and /or descriptions of materials, or the accuracy of

descriptions of existing conditions.

C. Contractor is to provide all labor, materials, equipment,

appurtenances, services, testing, insurance, permits, and

agreements necessary to perform the work required for the

abatement of asbestos as required by these contract documents,

technical specifications and all applicable laws and

regulations.

D. Refer to the General Conditions of the Specification for

specific insurance requirements.

E. All work shall be performed in accordance with this

Specification, EPA regulations, OSHA regulations, New Jersey

Administrative Code 5:23-8, N.J.S.A. 34:5A-32 et seq.,

N.J.A.C. 12:120, NIOSH recommendations, and any other

applicable federal, state or local government regulations.

Whenever there is a conflict or overlap of the above

references the most stringent provisions are applicable.

F. During the abatement project, the Contractor shall be

responsible for security in all areas affected by his

operation for:

1. Building security, fire and smoke detection systems.

2. Maintaining the existing building and utility systems

such as plumbing or electrical installations and the

Contractor shall provide security to prevent unauthorized

entry into the work area, and maintenance of




decontamination chambers, isolation barriers and negative

air filtration devices and systems.

G. Should the failure of any utility occur, the Owner will not be

responsible to the Contractor for loss of time or other

expense incurred.

H. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to remove, treat and

dispose of all asbestos-containing, and/or contaminated,

materials from the areas as indicated within the facility.

I. It is the Contractors responsibility to leave all abated

surfaces, and all exposed remaining adjacent surfaces,

encapsulated.

J. Special Requirements:

1. Waste containers are to be placed as indicated on the

abatement plans or as approved by the Owner’s ASCM.

2. The Contractor shall provide and install digital

manometers required for this project in accordance with

N.J.A.C. 5:23-8, including one (1) spare unit.

3. The contractor shall maintain an off-hours manometer

watch from the issuance of the Notice to Proceed with

asbestos work by the onsite AST, to the successful

completion of final air testing. The manometer watch

must be maintained from the end of the work shift until

the next working day. The manometer watch must be

maintained 24 hours a day during the weekends and

holidays.

4. The contractor is responsible for providing fire watch

during off-hours, 24 hours a day including weekends and

holidays.

5. A licensed electrician is required and shall be trained

on use of a respirator and handling asbestos materials.

6. The contractor shall dismount all fire, electrical, and

mechanical fixtures and appurtenances required for proper

execution of this contract.

7. The Contractor shall have available on site a generator

capable of providing power to the negative air units in

the event of a power failure. In such an event, all work

shall stop until the generator is engaged and negative

air pressure restored.




K. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to all precautions

necessary for the safety and health of the workers in

accordance with provisions of OSHA Standards 29 CFR Parts 1910

and 1926.

2.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Before start of work, submit the following to the Designer for

review.

NOTE: Do not start work until these submittals are returned

with the Designer's approval indicating that the submittal is

returned for unrestricted use.

1. GHS Compliant Safety Data Sheets in accordance with the

OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) for

the following:

a. Surfactants.

b. Encapsulants.

c. Solvents.

2. NESHAP Certification: Submit certification from

manufacturer of surfactant or removal encapsulant that,

to the extent required by this specification, the

material, if used in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, will wet Asbestos-Containing Materials

(ACM) to which it is applied as required by the National

Emission Standard for Hazardous Pollutants (NESHAP)

Asbestos Regulations (40 CFR 61, Subpart M).

2.5 USE OF BUILDING FACILITIES

A. Temporary Facilities: Refer to General Conditions for an

explanation and breakdown of responsibility.

2.6 USE OF THE PREMISES

A. Contractor shall confine his apparatus, the storage of

materials, and supplies, and the operation of his workmen to

limits established by law, ordinances, and the directions of

the ASCM. All flammable or combustible materials shall be

properly stored to obviate fire and in areas approved by the

Owner.




B. Contractor shall assure that no exits from the building are

obstructed, that appropriate safety barriers are established

to prevent access, and that Work Areas are kept neat, clean,

and safe.

C. All surrounding work, fixtures, soil lines, drains, water

lines, gas pipes, electrical conduit, wires, utilities, duct

work railings, shrubbery, landscaping, etc. which are to

remain in place shall be carefully protected and, if disturbed

or damaged, shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the

Owner, at no additional cost.

D. All routes through the building to be used by the Contractor

shall first be approved by the ASCM and the Owner.

E. Attention is specifically drawn to the fact that other

Contractors, performing the work of other Contracts, may be

(or are) brought upon any of the work sites of this Contract.

Therefore, the Contractor shall not have exclusive rights to

any site of his work and shall fully cooperate and coordinate

his work with the work of other Contractors who may be on (or

are on) any site of the work of this Contract. Regulated area

excepted.

2.7 WORK AREA PREPARATION

NOTE: Prior to initiating any preparation work, verify that the

Owner's Air Monitoring Firm has performed any necessary pre-test(s).

A. Inspection of the work area shall be made by representatives

of the Contractor and Owner before any work is initiated to

inventory any existing equipment. Special requirements

regarding live electric within the work area will be

identified and confirmed.

B. Caution signs shall be provided and displayed in accordance

with Section 1910.1001(g) of OSHA regulations, General

Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1-General

Requirements section of the specifications.

C. All electric must be shut down and shall be tagged and locked

out in the work area.

D. The following minimum locations for continuous area air

monitoring have been selected for each full containment work

area. The contractor shall ensure that power is available at

the following locations:




1. One sample in the clean room of each decontamination

unit.

2. One sample along worker/waste route outside of the clean

room.

3. One sample outside each critical barrier to each work

area.

4. One sample inside each work area.

5. One sample in the vicinity of the outdoor exhaust

location.

E. The samples shall be collected continuously throughout each

work shift. In the event that unacceptable airborne fiber

concentrations are detected in the building the extent of

contamination shall be determined by area air sampling, an

attempt shall be made to find the cause of the contamination,

the area shall be wet-wiped and HEPA vacuumed, and the area

shall be re-sampled in order to determine if the area can be

reoccupied. The area shall be reoccupied only if airborne

fiber concentrations are less than or equal to 0.01 fibers/cc.

F. Sequence Of Work

1. The following preparations shall be performed in the

stated order utilizing protective clothing and approved

respirators. These respirators shall be at least half-

face or full-face double cartridge respirators approved

by NIOSH for use in atmospheres containing asbestos. If

cartridge respirators are used, fit testing must be

performed. If powered air purifying respirators with

HEPA filters or supplied-air respirators are used, then

fit testing is not required.

a. Isolate the Work Area and provide an approved

decontamination facility. If the decontamination

unit is located outside of the building, it shall be

framed with 2" x 4" studs 16" O.C. and shall be

covered with plywood and a minimum of 2-layers of 6-

mil polyethylene sheeting. All chambers shall be a

minimum size of 4' x 4'.

b. Separation Barriers – construct separation barriers

in accordance with NJAC 5:23-8 to separate the work

area and dedicated contractor egress route from

occupied areas of the building.




c. If make-up air is to be drawn through the separation

barriers, a backflow preventer must be installed at

such openings.

d. Primary Barriers - cover all floor and wall surfaces

in the Work Area with plastic sheeting taped or

fastened securely in place to protect such surfaces

from water damage and to prevent contamination of

those surfaces. Floors shall be covered with a

double thickness of 6 mil polyethylene plastic

before the walls are covered. Plastic used to cover

floors shall run up the bottom of all adjacent walls

and be fastened at least 12 inches and 24 inches up

from the floor. The walls shall then be covered

with 2 layers of 6 mil polyethylene plastic,

supported at the top and of sufficient length to

reach the floor. Wall covering shall be sealed to

the plastic floor covering. This method of overlap

will help to protect the floor surfaces from water

damage and contamination. Floor drains shall be

sealed individually then the floors shall have a

minimum of two thicknesses of six-mil thick

polyethylene sheeting.

NOTE: In the event that the adhesive material used to

secure the plastic sheeting is found to be of

insufficient strength to support the weight of the

plastic barriers, then the Contractor shall use a

suitable stronger method of securing the plastic

sheeting (e.g. spray-on adhesive, glue beads,

horizontal wood battens). All securing procedures

shall be of first class workmanship. The contractor,

at his expense, shall restore any and all damaged

areas prior to completion of projects, which occur as

a result of barrier securing.

e. Critical Barriers - completely seal off all openings

to the Work Area, including but not limited to,

ducts, floor drains, doorways, corridors, windows

and skylights with two layers of six-mil plastic

sheeting taped securely in place or fastened by

spray-on adhesives, glue beads, or horizontal wood

battens.

f. Detach and clean removable electrical, heating and

ventilating equipment and other items connected to

asbestos surfaces if they are to be reused. These




items shall be removed from the work area using

decontamination procedures.

g. Clean with wet cloth or vacuum cleaner equipped with

High Efficiency Particulate Absolute (HEPA) filters,

all items and equipment, which can be removed

without disrupting the asbestos material. Cloths

and filters used for cleaning shall be disposed of

as contaminated waste.

h. Wet clean all non-removable items including built-in

equipment, in the work area and cover with two (2)

layers of six-mil thick plastic sheeting taped

securely in place.

i. Remove filters from all heat, ventilating, and air

conditioning systems located within the work area

and pack them in sealed 6 mil minimum double

thickness plastic bags, labeled for disposal as

asbestos containing waste. These bags should be

handled in the same manner as removed asbestos. The

filters should be replaced with new filters as a

final step in the decontamination process after the

final visual inspection and re-occupancy air

sampling.

j. Place work area under negative air pressure

utilizing HEPA filtration systems. Maintain

negative air pressure in work area continuously from

the start of asbestos removal until successful

completion of final clearance air testing. The

exhaust of all negative air machines must be

discharged to the outside of the building. Maintain

a minimum of 0.05 inches of water column and

negative air pressure and four (4) complete air

changes per hour of the work area. When determining

the number of negative air units, assume the actual

field measured available capacity.

Volume (ft3) x 4 = CFM Required

60 min

CFM Required = # Unit/s

Available Capacity/s (CFM)

k. In addition to the above requirements, two spare

HEPA filtration air movement machines will be kept

for each work area for use in the event of equipment

failure, filter changes, and other maintenance.




l. The Asbestos Safety Technician on site shall request

that the Contractor replace any negative air unit

that does not appear to be up to the task of

reliable, continuous operation. All negative air

unit exhaust shall be routed to the outside of the

building.

m. The Contractor shall supply at least one (1)

manometers per work area, and shall have one backup

unit available. Manometers shall be equipped to

produce a continuous reading strip chart recording

and shall remain in operation at all times regulated

area is under negative air pressure.

2. Asbestos removal will not begin until the decontamination

chamber and work site preparations are approved by the

Asbestos Safety Technician.

2.8 FULL CONTAINMENT REMOVAL METHODS FOR FRIABLE MATERIALS

A. The asbestos material shall be sprayed with water containing

and additive to enhance penetration (amended water). The

additive, or wetting agent, shall be 50% polyoxyethylene ester

and 50% polyoxyethylene ether at a concentration of 1 oz./5

gal. of water or approved equivalent. A fine low pressure

spray of this solution shall be applied to prevent fiber

disturbance preceding removal. Saturate the material

sufficiently to prevent emission of airborne fibers in excess

of 0.1 fibers/cc. The amended water shall be sprayed on as

many times and as often as necessary to ensure that the

asbestos material is adequately wetted throughout (especially

that asbestos nearest the substrate) to prevent dust emission

as specified in the OSHA regulations. No dry removal of

asbestos is allowable.

B. Removal of the asbestos material shall be done in small

sections by two person teams.

C. Workers shall begin working on the areas nearest to the

decontamination unit and work towards the negative air units.

D. The wet asbestos-containing material from each section shall

be picked up with rubber pans and rubber squeegees and then be

packed and sealed into labeled 6 mil plastic bags prior to

starting the next section to prevent the material from drying.

Metal shovels shall not be used to pick up or move asbestos

waste. Water-soaked fallen material shall not be left out of




bags overnight or for more than four hours to prevent loss of

its water content due to evaporation.

E. Plastic bags will not be effective when wire or wood lath and

similar sharp-edged materials are involved in asbestos

removal. Therefore, contaminated material containing

sharp-edged items shall be cut to size while adequately wet,

placed in small cardboard boxes and double bagged, or singly

bagged and then placed in temporary fiber drums.

F. All waste shall be disposed in accordance with New Jersey

Department of Environmental Protection requirements and the 40

CFR Part 61, Subpart M. The outside of all containers shall

be wet-cleaned or HEPA vacuumed before leaving the Work Area.

All vacuum cleaners shall be equipped with HEPA filters.

NOTE: Regulations prescribes a leak-tight container, the

integrity of which is the Contractor's responsibility until

after deposition at a sanitary landfill. Therefore, caution

must be used in the choice of container types and

consideration given to the method of unloading at the

landfill. Fragile containers shall be unloaded by hand to

prevent rupture and possible airborne emissions.

G. After completion of this removal phase (stripping), all

surfaces from which asbestos has been removed shall be

scrubbed using a nylon bristle brush and/or wet cleaned to

remove all visible asbestos containing material. During this

work, the surfaces being cleaned shall be kept wet using

amended water. All disposable equipment shall be packaged for

disposal. Containers shall be washed with amended water and

shall have all exterior particulate matter removed prior to

removal from the contaminated area.

H. All equipment and asbestos waste containers shall be

decontaminated and removed from the enclosure as follows:

1. While still in the Work Area, clean all external surfaces

of equipment and containers by wet sponging or HEPA

vacuum.

2. After gross decontamination in Work Area, move equipment

and containers into Equipment Wash Room for complete

decontamination.

3. Periodically, workers dressed in clean disposable

coveralls shall enter the Holding Area from

uncontaminated areas to remove clean equipment and




containers. Do not enter Equipment Wash Room when

removing equipment and containers.

I. All free water (in contaminated areas) shall be retrieved and

added to asbestos contaminated waste and then placed in

plastic lined leak-tight container for disposal.

J. Waste removal (bag out) shall occur at the end of each work

shift. The AST shall be continuously present during waste

removal. Bulk waste and decontaminated non-asbestos materials

shall be removed through the same egress route to the

exterior.

K. Initial Clean-up

The following procedures must be accomplished utilizing

protective clothing and approved respirators and with the work

area under negative pressure:

1. The Contractor shall first clean all surfaces in the Work

Area using disposable cloths wetted with amended water.

These cloths shall be disposed of or rinsed thoroughly on

a frequency sufficient to eliminate visible accumulation

of debris. Then, when these surfaces have been allowed

to dry sufficiently, all surfaces shall be cleaned again

using a HEPA filtered vacuum.

NOTE: A HEPA vacuum will fail if used on wet material.

L. Surface Sealing

After completion of cleaning all exposed surfaces in the Work

Area, and after the Contractor receives a satisfactory pre-

sealant inspection the Contractor shall proceed with the

following steps:

1. Spray coat all exposed surfaces with a binding agent such

as an encapsulant. The surfaces to be coated shall

include surfaces from which asbestos containing materials

have been removed (such as walls, ceilings, floors,

structural steel, decking, ducting, pipes, etc.) and

polyethylene which has been used to cover walls, floor

and non removable fixtures, and equipment. Over spray

from ceiling, walls, fixtures and equipment will usually

be sufficient to coat floor coverings. Plastic used to

maintain critical barriers between Work Areas and Clean

Areas such as those in doorways, windows, light fixtures,

clocks, speakers and air vents shall not be removed until




air monitoring is completed and satisfactory results have

been obtained.

2. After spray coating the plastic sheeting used to protect

floors, walls, fixtures and equipment, (Primary

Barriers), the plastic shall be carefully removed and

rolled up with the contaminated portion inside and

packaged for disposal. Wet clean all walls, floors,

woodwork, ceilings, electric light fixtures and other

surfaces.

M. Final Clean-up

The following operation shall be performed under negative air

conditions with respirators and protective clothing:

1. All walls, floors and other surfaces shall be cleaned

with damp cloths and/or HEPA vacuumed.

2. After the first cleaning, the Contractor shall wait a

sufficient time to allow the settlement of dust and then

wet clean all surfaces in the Work Area again and allow

to dry. Cleaning shall continue until all visible

residues have been removed, including dust, grit and

other particulate matter.

3. Cleaning shall continue until all visible residues have

been removed, including dust, grit and other particulate

matter.

4. Cloths, sponges, etc. used in the cleaning operation


N. After completion of the cleaning operation, the Contractor

shall:

1. Notify the Owner's Testing Firm that a post removal

inspection can be performed to insure all visible

asbestos has been removed and the area is dust free. The

Owner's Testing Firm will conduct an aggressive visual

inspection of all Work Areas. In addition to a visual

inspection conducted at the floor level, the Testing Firm

shall inspect all exposed surfaced in the work areas,

including those at the ceiling level (using ladders as

necessary), to ensure that no visible asbestos containing

materials have been left above the ceiling, structural

members or other surfaces. All visible residues must be

removed before air monitoring can be performed.

2. Request air monitoring of the Work Area by the Owner's

Testing Firm within 48 hours of a favorable visual




inspection in accordance with N.J.A.C. 5:23-8.21 (c) .

The Owner's Testing Firm will then conduct overall work

area clearance testing under simulated conditions of

normal building occupancy known as aggressive sampling as

indicated in the Owner's Project Monitoring

Specifications. Fans with a minimum radius of 1' shall

be used in each room to be monitored to stir up any

residual invisible fibers such as would be entrained in

the air by the pedestrian traffic under conditions of

normal occupancy. Forced air equipment, such as a 1

horsepower leaf blower, will be used to suspend

particulate which may be clinging to walls, ceilings,

floors, ledges and other surfaces. Asbestos fiber

concentrations shall not exceed 70 structures/mm2.

3. Air monitoring results shall meet the following:

a. The concentration shall not exceed 70

structures/mm2.

NOTE: This test is required before critical barrier

removal and reconstruction activities may begin. It

shall be sufficient for final air quality monitoring for

building occupancy.

b. If test results show asbestos fiber concentrations

to be greater than 70 structures/mm2, the cleanup

shall be repeated until compliance is achieved. Re-

clean all surfaces and operate the HEPA equipped

Negative Air Filtration Units to exhaust air outside

the Work Area to filter the air.

O. Reconstruction

After the Work Area is found to be in compliance with Part J

above, (less than 70 structures/mm2) the following tasks shall

be performed by the Contractor:

1. All critical barriers shall be unsealed.

2. All remaining plastic sheeting, tape and any other debris

shall be disposed of in sealed plastic bags labeled as

asbestos contaminated waste.

3. The inside of windows shall be washed.

4. Any walls, floors, trim, doors, furniture or other items

damaged during the work shall be repaired and refinished

to match existing material.




5. Woodwork, trim, floor, furniture, plumbing and electric

light fixtures shall be cleaned.

6. Clothes or sponges used in the cleaning operation shall

be disposed of as contaminated waste.

7. There shall be no residue left on floors, ceilings,

electric light fixtures or any other surfaces.

2.9 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

A. Develop and implement a written standard procedure for

abatement work to ensure maximum protection and safeguard from

asbestos exposure of the workers, the non-work areas of the

school, visitors, employees, public, and environment.

B. The standard operating procedure shall ensure:

1. Tight security from unauthorized entry into the

workspace.

2. Restriction of Contractor's personnel to the immediate

Work Area and access/egress routes.

3. Donning of proper protective clothing and respiratory

protection prior to entering the Work Area.

4. Safe work practices in the work place, including

provisions for inter-room communication, exclusion of

eating, drinking, smoking, or in any way breaking the

respiratory protection.

5. Proper exit practices from the work space to the outside

through the showering and decontamination facilities.

6. Removing asbestos in ways that minimize release of

fibers.

7. Packing, labeling, loading, transporting, and disposing

of contaminated material in a way that will minimize

exposure and contamination.

8. Emergency evacuation procedures, for medical or safety

situations, to minimize the potential exposure to

airborne asbestos fibers for emergency personnel,

building occupants, and building environment.

9. Safety from accidents in the workspace, especially from

electrical shocks, fall hazards associated with

scaffolding, slippery surfaces, and entanglements in

loose hoses and equipment. The safety procedures outlined

in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and




the Division 1-General requirements section of the

specifications must be adhered to as well.

10. Provisions for effective supervision, air monitoring and

personnel monitoring for exposure during the work.

11. Engineering systems that minimize exposure to fibers

within the workspace.

2.10 NOTIFICATIONS, PERMITS, WARNING SIGNS, LABELS AND POSTERS

A. Erect bilingual (English-Spanish) warning signs around the

work space and at every point of potential entry from the

outside and at main entrance to building which can be viewed

by the public without obstruction, in accordance with OSHA 29

CFR 1926.58 (K) (Sign Specifications) and N.J.A.C. 5:23-8. The

warning signs shall be a bright color so that they will be

easily noticeable. The size of the sign and the size of the

lettering shall be no less than OSHA requirements.

B. Provide the required labels for all polyethylene bags and all

drums utilized to transport contaminated material to the

landfill in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.58 (K)(2) and by

49 CFR Parts 171 and 172 of the Department of Transportation

regulations.

C. Provide any other signs, labels, warnings, and posted

instructions that are necessary to protect, inform and warn

people of the hazard from asbestos exposure. Post in a

prominent and convenient place for the workers a copy of the

latest applicable regulations from OSHA, EPA, NIOSH, New

Jersey and any additional items mandated for posting by the

aforementioned regulations.

D. The ASCM shall obtain all local permits required to perform

the Work. It is the responsibility of the contractor to

verify that all permits have been acquired.

2.11 EMERGENCY PRECAUTIONS

A. Establish emergency and fire exits from the Work Area. The

clean side of all emergency exits shall be equipped with two

full sets of protective clothing and respirators at all times.

B. Notify local medical emergency personnel, both ambulance crews

and hospital emergency room staff prior to commencement of

abatement operations as to the possibility of having to handle




contaminated or injured workmen, and shall be advised on safe

decontamination.

C. Prepare to administer first aid to injured personnel after

decontamination. Seriously injured personnel shall be treated

immediately or evacuated immediately for decontamination. When

an injury occurs, precautions shall be taken to reduce

airborne fiber concentrations (i.e. misting of the air with

water) until the injured person has been removed from the Work

Area.

D. Notify, before actual removal of the asbestos material, the

local police and fire departments to the danger of entering

the Work Area. Contractor shall make every effort to help

these agencies form plans of action should their personnel

need to enter the contaminated area.

2.12 PROTECTION AND DAMAGE

A. The Contractor will replace or repair any items damaged, due

to work performed under this contract, equal to their original

construction and/or finish. All repaired or replaced items

will be subject to the Owner’s approval.

B. Use rubber-tire vehicles, which use non-volatile fuels for

conveying material inside the building and provide temporary

covering, as necessary to protect floors.

C. No materials shall be thrown from windows or doors of the

building. Building waste systems shall not be used to remove

refuse.

D. Debris shall be removed from the site daily. Premises shall

be left neat and clean after each work shift, so that work may

proceed the next regular work day without interruption or

delay.

E. Protect all floors from damage, wear and/or staining.

2.13 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

A. Protective clothing shall consist of disposable full body

coveralls with hoods and boots attached. Separate disposable

head covers and foot covering may be substituted if disposable

coveralls without attached hoods and booties are used.

Additional clothing shall include rubber boots and gloves as




per the variance. Eye protection and hard hats shall be

available.

B. Contractors may choose between three types of respiratory

protection as specified. In order of increasing effectiveness

they are:

1. Half-face or full-face, negative pressure respirators

equipped with dual cartridge HEPA filters and certified

by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and

Health (NIOSH) for use in atmospheres containing

asbestos.

2. Powered air-purifying respirators certified by NIOSH for

use in atmospheres containing asbestos.

3. Type "C" supplied-air respirators, either continuous flow

or pressure demand class as certified by NIOSH.

a. (NOTE: Disposable paper respirators are

unacceptable.)

C. The Contractor shall require that each person entering the

Work Area shall wear an approved respirator and protective

clothing. There shall be no exceptions to this rule.

D. The Contractor shall have available sufficient inventory of

protective clothing, respirators, and filter cartridges.

Personal protective equipment inventory shall exceed by a

minimum of 100% the expected daily person-day usage.

E. The Contractor shall provide respirators and disposable

clothing to the Asbestos Safety Technician and any other

visitor authorized by the Client.

2.14 WORKER EXPOSURE AIR MONITORING

A. In addition to the independent air-monitoring firm hired by

the Client, the Contractor shall arrange for air monitoring to

be conducted in all work Areas in accordance with 29 CFR

1926.1101 of OSHA regulations, on behalf of the Contractor's

employees. The Testing Laboratory employed by the Contractor

shall be accredited by the American Industrial Hygiene

Association for Asbestos or participate and show proficiency

in the NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety

Health) PAT (Proficiency Analytical Testing) program for

airborne asbestos.




B. Personal samples shall be obtained from employees engaged in

each of the following operations; asbestos removal (i.e.

spraying, scraping and brushing), disposal (i.e. bagging) and

clean up. Representative sampling shall be repeated in the

event of major changes in the removal operation. This

sampling shall be done with the sampling media and flow rates

specified in the OSHA Reference (Method 7400 A rules).

Samples shall be taken for the determination of the 8-hour

time weighted average airborne concentration and of the

ceiling concentrations of asbestos fibers.

C. The results of the Contractor's air monitoring tests (Subpart

B above) shall be returned within 24 hours; copies shall be

provided to each employee monitored as specified by OSHA

Regulation 29 CFR 1910.20.

D. The Contractor shall examine these results and evaluate the

effectiveness of the controls in use (wet methods, exhaust

units and respiratory protection). Copies of these monitoring

tests shall be provided to the Client's Asbestos Safety

Technician. Copies shall also be made available upon request

to representatives of Local, State, or Federal enforcement

agencies.

2.15 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE

A. All asbestos waste materials destined for disposal shall be

wetted and packaged in permanently-sealed, leak-tight

containers (such as six-mil plastic bags) appropriately

labeled in accordance with Title 40 CFR 61.152 before it can

be legally transported and disposed of. Labels must indicate

the name of the generator and the location where the waste was

generated as per the NESHAP revision published November 20,

1990, in the Federal Register.

B. The deposition of all asbestos-containing material must be at

waste disposal sites operated in accordance with the

provisions of Title 40 CFR 61.156. Copies of asbestos waste

manifests and/or other receipts issued by the approved dump

site must be provided to the Owner for each load of asbestos-


C. A notification of intent to dispose of asbestos shall be sent

to the New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection at

least 10 days prior to actual disposal.




D. All asbestos waste materials destined for disposal in New

Jersey shall be wetted and packaged in permanently sealed,

leak-tight containers (such as 6-mil plastic bags, double

bagged with visible labels) in accordance with 40 CFR 61.20-25

before it can be legally transported and disposed of in New

Jersey. No haulage of loose asbestos is permitted.

E. The notification of C above shall include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of the removal

project.

2. Quantity and nature of the waste to be disposed.

3. Name, address, and New Jersey Department of Environmental

Protection registration number of the collector-handler.

4. Name and address of the landfill at which disposal will

occur.

5. Date and time of disposal.

6. A copy of any written notification required by 40 CFR

61.22 to 61.25.

F. Asbestos waste, which is properly packaged, shall be disposed

of at a landfill, which is registered, by the New Jersey

Department of Environmental Protection in conformance with the

following:

1. The landfill used must be registered by the New Jersey

Department of Environmental Protection to accept Waste ID

#27.

2. The specific landfill facility chosen must be one

designated by the New Jersey Department of Environmental

Protection as the recipient facility for the community in

which the removal project is located.

3. The waste hauler must possess a valid solid waste

transporter registration issued by the New Jersey

Department of Environmental Protection. A licensed solid

waste transporter shall be a commercial collector/hauler

or shall be the removal company if they are so

registered.

4. Asbestos waste can be hauled in dumpster containers

provided the load is comprised only of asbestos in bags

and does not contain any other wastes or asbestos-

containing wastes which could compromise the integrity of

the permanent containers.




5. If rough surfaces or other materials are present in the

load, which could potentially puncture the permanent

containers, then those containers shall be enclosed in

temporary fiber or steel drums during loading, transport,

and unloading operations. In addition, asbestos wastes

shall not be loaded into or hauled with vehicles

containing compactor devices.

6. To determine which landfill to use for a particular

project, N.J.A.C. 7:26-6.5 shall be consulted.

7. A certificate of completion shall not be issued by the

AST until the waste disposal unit has been removed from

the work site.

8. Locations of waste containers must be coordinated with

the ASCM Firm prior to being dropped by the waste hauler.

9. The waste container must be a fully enclosed unit with a

lockable door or lid.

2.16 CONTINGENCY PLAN

A. In the event airborne asbestos concentrations in excess of

0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter of air are detected outside

the Work Area or the pressure differential drops below 0.05

inches w.c. this contingency plan must be implemented

immediately by the Asbestos Removal Contractor under the

direction of the Asbestos Safety Technician.

B. In the event the pressure drops below 0.05 inches w.c. the

Asbestos Safety Technician and Contractor Supervisor shall

immediately inspect and evaluate all critical barriers and

make any necessary repairs. Investigate and evaluate all

engineering controls to determine the source of the pressure

loss. The Contractor shall institute corrective action such

as additional sealing, critical barrier maintenance, and

construction, changing exhaust unit filters, adjustment of

make-up air, operation of additional exhaust units and/or

other necessary measures to reestablish an acceptable pressure

differential.

If the pressure drops below 0.01 inches w.c. the following

procedures must be implemented:

1. The Contractor shall cease abatement activity in the work

area.




2. The Asbestos Safety Technician and Contractor Supervisor

shall immediately inspect and evaluate all critical

barriers and make any necessary repairs. Investigate and

evaluate all engineering controls to determine the source

of the pressure loss.

3. The Contractor shall institute corrective action such as

additional sealing, critical barrier maintenance, and

construction, changing exhaust unit filters, adjustment

of make-up air, and operation of additional exhaust units

and/or other necessary measures to reestablish an

acceptable pressure differential.

4. Re-occupancy shall not be permitted in any area unless a

pressure differential of 0.05 inches of w.c. or greater

is re-established.

5. If a pressure differential of 0.05 inches of w.c. or

greater is not reestablished within 24 hours of the first

reading below 0.01 inches of w.c. then the building shall

be evacuated.

C. If air sample results exceed 0.010 f/cc the following

procedures shall be implemented:

1. The Asbestos Safety Technician and Contractor Supervisor

shall immediately inspect and evaluate all critical

barriers and make any necessary repairs. Investigate and

evaluate all engineering controls to determine the source

of the high air level.

2. Collect an additional (second) PCM air sample at each

place where a high air sample result was detected. If

the second result is less than or equal to 0.01 f/cc the

contingency plan is terminated. If the result of the

second air sample still exceeds the 0.01 f/cc the ASCM

has the option to reclean or submit and analyze the

sample by transmission electron microscopy. If the

sample still exceeds the 0.01 f/cc criteria then cleaning

shall be undertaken. Cleaning and resampling shall be

undertaken until the affected area(s) pass the 0.01f/cc

criteria. Reoccupancy in any area that exceeded the 0.01

f/cc criteria cannot occur until each area has passed the

0.01 f/cc criteria.

3. Cleaning shall include but not be limited to wet wiping

and misting the air. Cleaning the affected area shall be

continued outside the containment and PCM sampling shall

also be continued until the result in the area is equal

to or less than 0.01 f/cc by either PCM or TEM analysis.




4. If laboratory analysis of air samples does not yield a

reading of less than or equal to 0.01f/cc within 24 hours

receipt of the first test above 0.010 f/cc. then the

building shall be evacuated.

5. Re-occupancy in any area that exceeded the 0.01 f/cc

criteria cannot occur until each area has passed the 0.01

f/cc criteria.

D. If a power outage occurs when the building is occupied

occupancy will not be permitted until air samples determine

that the spaces to be occupied are safe and power has been

restored.

PART 3 - PRODUCTS

3.1 QUALITY

A. Deliver all materials to the job site in their manufacturer's

original container, with the manufacturer's label intact and

legible.

1. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and

labels intact until time of use.

2. Store all materials on pallets, away from any damp and/or

wet surface. Cover materials in order to prevent damage

and/or contamination.

3. Promptly remove damaged materials and unsuitable items

from the job site, and promptly replace with material

meeting the specified requirements, at no additional cost

to the Owner.

B. The Asbestos Safety Technician may reject as non-complying

such material and products that do not bear satisfactory

identification as to manufacturer, grade, quality and other

pertinent information.

3.2 MATERIALS

A. Wetting agent shall be an approved surfactant specified by the

manufacturer for use in asbestos abatement.

B. Acceptable sealants shall be:




1. Sealing material shall be both penetrating and bridging

and may be applied by a one or two coat system and shall

meet the following criteria:

a. ASTM Standard E84-84

b. Class A Fire Rating Flame Spread: 0-25

Fuel Contribution: 10

Smoke Density: 5

c. Underwriters Laboratory approval for Class 1A.

C. Framing Materials and Doors: As required to construct

temporary decontamination facilities and Isolation Barriers.

Lumber shall be high grade, new, and fire retardant.

D. Fire Retardant Polyethylene Sheeting: minimum uniform

thickness of 6-mil. Provide largest size possible to minimize

seams.

E. Fire Retardant Reinforced Polyethylene Sheeting: For covering

floor of decontamination units, provide translucent, nylon

reinforced or woven polyethylene laminated, fire retardant

polyethylene sheeting. Provide largest size possible to

minimize seams, minimum uniform thickness 6-mil.

F. Drums: Asbestos transporting drums, sealable and clearly

marked with warning labels as required by OSHA and EPA.

G. Polyethylene Disposal Bags: Asbestos disposal bags, minimum of

6-mil thick. Bags shall be clearly marked with warning labels

as required by OSHA and EPA.

H. Signs: Asbestos warning signs for posting at perimeter of Work

Area, as required by OSHA and EPA.

I. Waste Container Bag Liners and Flexible Trailer Trays: One

piece leak-resistant flexible tray with absorbent pad, as

manufactured by Packaging Research and Design Corporation or

approved equivalent.

J. Tape: Provide tape, which is of high quality with an adhesive,

which is formulated to aggressively stick to sheet

polyethylene, as manufactured by Kendall Co., NASHUA Tape

Products; or approved equivalent.




K. Spray Adhesive: Provide spray adhesive in aerosol cans which

is specifically formulated to stick tenaciously to sheet

polyethylene, as manufactured by 3M; NASHUA Tape Products; or


L. Flexible Duct: Spiral reinforced flex duct for air filtration

devices.

M. Disposable Coveralls: Dupont “Blockade” as manufactured by

Dupont Company of,” Kleenguard Limited USE Coveralls” or

“Duraguard” coveralls as manufactured by Kimberly Clark

Corporation, or approved equivalent.

3.3 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Air Filtration Device (AFD): AFDs shall be equipped with High

Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filtration systems and shall

be approved by and listed with Underwriter's Laboratory. Air

filtration devices shall be “Microtrap” as manufactured by

Asbestos Control Technology, or “RAM AIR 2M” as manufactured

by Aramsco, or “Environmental Ltd., 300” as manufactured by

Torchcross Agency Environmental, or approved equivalent.

B. Scaffolding: All scaffolding shall be designed and constructed

in accordance with OSHA (29 CFR 1926/1910), New Jersey

Building Code, and any other applicable federal, state and

local government regulations. Whenever there is a conflict or

overlap of the above references the most stringent provisions

are applicable. All scaffolding and components shall be

capable of supporting without failure a minimum of four times

the maximum intended load, plus an allowance for impact.

1. Provide non-skid surface on all scaffold surfaces subject

to foot traffic. Scaffold ends and joints shall be

sealed with tape to prevent penetration of asbestos

fibers.

2. Equip rungs of all metal ladders, etc., with an abrasive,

non-slip surface.

C. Transportation Equipment: Transportation Equipment, as

required, shall be suitable for loading, temporary storage,

transit and unloading of contaminated waste without exposure

to persons or property. Any temporary storage containers

positioned outside the building for temporary storage shall be

metal, closed and locked.




D. Vacuum Equipment: All vacuum equipment utilized in the Work

Area shall utilize HEPA filtration systems. Vacuum equipment

shall be as manufactured by Nilfisk of America (Models. GS 81

or GS 83) or approved equivalent.

E. Vacuum Attachments: Soft Brush Attachment, Asbestos Scraper

Tool, Drill Dust Control Kit.

F. Electric Sprayer: An electric airless sprayer suitable for

application of encapsulating material and shall be approved by

and listed with Underwriters Laboratory.

G. Water Sprayer: The water sprayer shall be an airless or other

low-pressure sprayer for amended water application.

H. Portable Shower: For personnel decontamination, Enviro-Clean

by CRSI; Aero-Porta Shower; or approved equivalent.

I. Water Atomizer: Powered air-misting device, equipped with a

ground fault interrupter and equipped to operate continuously.

Water atomizer device shall be the “Tri-Jet DS”, No. 6228, as

manufactured by Fogmaster Corp., or EM 490 Portable

Electrical/Airless Sprayer as manufactured by Graco, Inc., or


J. Brushes: All brushes shall have nylon bristles. Wire brushes

are excluded from use due to their potential to shred asbestos

fibers into small, fine fibers. Wire brushes maybe used for

cleaning pipe joints within glove-bags upon written approval

of the Resident Engineer.

K. Hand Power Tools: shall be equipped with HEPA-filtered local

exhaust ventilation if used to drill, cut into or otherwise

disturb ACM.

L. Other Tools and Equipment: Contractor shall provide other

suitable tools for the stripping, removal, encapsulation, and

disposal activities including but not limited to: hand-held

scrapers, sponges, rounded-edge shovels, brooms, and carts.

M. Fans and Leaf Blower: Provide Leaf Blower (one leaf blower per

floor) and one 20-inch diameter fans for each 10,000 cubic

feet of Work Area volume to be used for aggressive sampling

technique for clearance air testing.

N. Fire Extinguishers: Provide type “A” fire extinguishers for

temporary offices and similar spaces where there is minimal

danger of electrical or grease-oil-flammable liquid fires. In




other areas, provide type “ABC” dry chemical extinguishers of

NFPA recommended types for the exposure in each case. All

fire extinguishers shall comply with the applicable

recommendations of NFPA Standard 10, “Standard for Portable

Extinguishers.” Provide a minimum of four fire extinguishers

in each Work Area; one in the equipment room of the

decontamination unit, one outside the Work Area in the clean

room or directly outside same, and two fire extinguishers

where they are most effective for their intended purpose. Do

not exceed seventy-five feet between fire extinguishers within

the Work Area.

O. First Aid Kits: Contractor shall maintain adequately stocked

first aid kits in the clean rooms of the decontamination units

and within Work Areas. The first aid kit shall be approved by

a licensed physician for the work to be performed under this

Contract.

P. Water Service:

1. Refer to the Division 1-General Requirements for

temporary water service requirements.

2. Temporary Water Service Connection: All connections to

the Facilities water system shall include back flow

protection. Valves shall be temperature and pressure

rated for operation of the temperature and pressures

encountered. After completion of use, connections and

fittings shall be removed without damage or alteration to

existing water piping, and equipment. Leaking or

dripping fittings/valves shall be repaired and or

replaced as required.

3. Water Hoses: Employ new heavy-duty abrasion-resistant

hoses with a pressure rating greater than the maximum

pressure of the water distribution system to provide

water into each Work Area and to each Decontamination

Enclosure Unit. Provide fittings as required for

connection to existing wall hydrants or spouts, as well

as temporary water heating equipment, branch piping,

showers shut-off nozzles and equipment.

4. Water Heater: Provide UL rated 40-gallon electric water

heaters to supply hot water for Personal Decontamination

Enclosure System Shower. Activate from 30 Amp Circuit

breakers located within the Decontamination Enclosure

subpanel. Provide relief valve compatible with water

heater operations, pipe relief valve down to drip pan at

floor level with type `L' copper piping. Drip pans shall




be 6-inch deep and securely fastened to water heater.

Wiring of the water heater shall comply with NEMA, NECA,

and UL standards.

Q. Electrical Service:

1. General: Comply with applicable NEMA, NECA and UL

standards and governing regulations for materials and

layout of temporary electric service.

2. Refer to the Division 1-General Requirements for

temporary electric service requirements.

3. Temporary Power: Provide service to decontamination unit

subpanel with minimum 60 AMP, two pole circuit breaker or

fused disconnect connected to the building's main

distribution panel. Subpanel and disconnect shall be

sized and equipped to accommodate all electrical

equipment required for completion of the work.

4. Voltage Differences: Provide identification warning signs

at power outlets that are other than 110-120 volt power.

Provide polarized outlets for plug-in type outlets, to

prevent insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher

voltage outlets. Dry type transformers shall be provided

where required to provide voltages necessary for work

operations.

5. Ground Fault Protection: Equip all circuits for any

purpose entering Work Area with ground fault circuit

interrupters (GFCI). Locate GFCIs exterior to Work Area

so that all circuits are protected prior to entry to Work

Area. Provide circuit breaker type ground fault circuit

interrupters (GFCI) equipped with test button and reset

switch for all circuits to be used for any purpose in

Work Area, decontamination units, exterior, or as

otherwise required by NEC, OSHA or other authority.

Locate in panel exterior to Work Area.

6. Power Distribution System: Provide circuits of adequate

size and proper characteristics for each use. In general

run wiring overhead, and rise vertically where wiring

will be least subject to damage from operations.

7. Temporary Wiring: In the Work Area shall be type UF non-

metallic sheathed cable located overhead and exposed for

surveillance. Provide liquid tight enclosures or boxes

for all wiring devices. Do not wire temporary lighting

with plain, exposed (insulated) electrical conductors.




8. Electrical Power Cords: Use only grounded extension

cords; use hard service cords where exposed to traffic

and abrasion. Use single lengths of cords only.

9. Temporary Lighting: All lighting within the Work Area

shall be liquid and moisture proof and designed for the

use intended.

a. Provide sufficient temporary lighting to ensure

proper workmanship everywhere; by combined use of

daylight, general lighting, and portable plug-in

task lighting.

b. Provide lighting in the Decontamination Unit as

required supplying a minimum 50-foot candle light

level.

PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.1 PERMITS, NOTIFICATIONS AND LICENSING

A. The Contractor shall present a duplicate copy of his asbestos

contractor’s license issued by the New Jersey Department of

Labor with his bid. Only licensed contractors may perform

work described as required by this specification. As required

by law, the contractor shall maintain on the project site a

valid Contractors license at all times during the work.

B. The Contractor shall apply for the necessary construction

permits and licenses with the jurisdictional authority for

asbestos abatement work.

C. The Contractor shall maintain the required number of qualified

personnel on site to complete the project on schedule.

D. ALL CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES MUST POSSESS A VALID NEW JERSEY

ASBESTOS REMOVAL PERMIT AND MAKE AVAILABLE TO THE OWNER,

ASBESTOS SAFETY TECHNICIAN, NJ DCA, NJ DOL, AND NJ DOH THESE

PERMITS UPON REQUEST AT THE PROJECT SITE. ALL EMPLOYEES MUST

HAVE A MINIMUM OF AT LEAST SIX (6) MONTHS PRIOR EXPERIENCE IN

ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WITHIN THE STATE OF NEW JERSEY.

E. The Contractor shall also present to the Asbestos Safety

Technician, and Owner, prior to the commencement of abatement

that a NJ DEP Registered Waste Hauler has been contracted to

haul the waste off site and to an appropriate New Jersey

landfill.




NO PRECOMMENCEMENT INSPECTION SHALL TAKE PLACE UNTIL SUCH

PROOF EXISTS AND IS SATISFACTORY TO THE NJ DCA, THE ASCM/AST,

AND THE OWNER.

F. At the completion of the project the Contractor will submit

the following documentation to the owner with their invoice,

with a copy submitted to Brinkerhoff Environmental Services.:

1. The Certificate of Acceptance/Occupancy from the local

construction official.

2. A copy of all waste manifests.

4.2 INSPECTIONS

A. The Asbestos Safety Technician will perform the following

inspections:

1. Pre-commencement inspection, which verifies that all

enclosure protection and engineering controls are in

place before actual gross removal of ACM takes place,

will be conducted prior to each phase of work. The

Asbestos Safety Technician will observe and check

compliance with the following:

a. Critical/separation barriers are in place

b. Negative air filtration devices are in place and

operational

c. Notification, variances, permits, placards and

Contractor’s licenses are posted

d. Waste container is on site and properly labeled

e. OSHA signs are posted

f. Emergency plans and numbers are posted

g. Decontamination meets all requirements and is in

operation

h. Plastic sheeting is in place on walls, floors, and

ceilings

i. Proper and adequate quantities of supplies, such as

suits, respirators and filters, towels, bags and

other equipment

j. Locked out and tagged out electrical system

k. Disconnected HVAC system




l. Ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCI’s) are in

place outside the work area and operational

2. Periodic unannounced inspections will be made by the

Asbestos Safety Technician to ensure compliance with the

specifications and all applicable rules and regulations,

as per N.J.A.C. 5:23-8.

3. Pre-encapsulation (sealant) inspection, which verifies

that all ACM has been removed and the work area is dust

free before the area, is sprayed with a sealant. The

Contractor is required to notify the in writing, 48

hours prior, that a pre-encapsulation inspection is

requested. The AST shall notify the Contractor in writing

the results of the inspection.

4. Final clean-up inspection, which verifies that the

enclosure is ready for the collection of the final air

clearance samples. The Contractor is required to notify

the Asbestos Safety Technician (AST) in writing, 24 hours

prior, that a final visual inspection is requested. The

AST shall notify the Contractor in writing the results of

the inspection. No final visual inspection will be

conducted unless the work area is dry and free of any

standing moisture or wet surfaces.

5. During each inspection the Contractor must have a

Licensed Supervisor present.

6. The NJ DCA and the NJ DOL are authorized to conduct

unannounced inspections and periodic inspection during

the abatement project to ensure compliance with all

applicable regulation under their authority.

7. The Owner will also conduct unannounced, random

inspections of the AST and the Contractors work

performance, compliance with this specification and the

applicable regulations. All directives will be given to

the AST to be forwarded to the Contractor.

4.3 DECONTAMINATION FACILITIES AND PROCEDURES

A. The Contractor shall provide an adequate decontamination unit

consisting of a serial arrangement of rooms or spaces attached

to the Work Area and meeting the requirements of NJAC 5:23-

8.15 and criteria outlined in Subpart B below. Each airlock

shall be clearly identified and separated from the other by

plastic crossover sheet doors designed to minimize fiber and

air transfer as people pass between areas. A minimum of ½




inch fire retardant plywood with two layers of six-mil plastic

sheeting shall be required for floors, walls, and the ceiling

for decontamination units. Plastic crossover sheet doors

shall have at least three layers of six-mil plastic sheeting

and be weighted so as to fall into place when people pass

through the area.

B. Decontamination chamber doors shall be of sufficient height

and width to enable replacement of equipment that may fail and

to safely stretcher or carry an injured worker from the site

without destruction of the chamber or unnecessary risk to the

integrity of the work area. Such doors must be at least 4

feet wide, and the distance between sets of flaps must be at

least 4 feet. Lockable doors shall be installed at the clean

room entrance.

C. The Contractor shall have available adequate shower facilities

with hot and cold water adjustable at the tap and sufficient

plumbing for these showers including sufficient hose length

and drain systems or an acceptable alternate such as a

portable decontamination trailer with showers. All shower

facilities and changing areas will be heated to at least 70oF

as required. Waste shower water shall be filtered through

5-um filters or recycled to be used as a wetting agent or

added to asbestos contaminated waste before disposal in an

approved landfill.

D. The decontamination areas are described below:

1. Clean Room: In this room persons remove and leave all

street clothes and put on clean disposable coveralls.

Approved respiratory protection equipment is also picked

up in this area. No asbestos contaminated items are

permitted in this room.

2. Shower Room: This is a separate room used for transit by

cleanly dressed people entering the job site from the

clean room and for showering by them after they have

undressed in the equipment room. This is a contaminated

area.

3. Equipment Room: Work equipment, footwear, and all other

contaminated work clothing shall be stored here. This is

also a change area transit room for people. All areas

between the shower room and work area shall be considered

part of the equipment room. This is a contaminated area.

E. Workers and visitors shall observe the following work area

entry and exit procedures:




1. Worker enters clean room and removes street clothing,

puts on clean overalls and respirator, and passes through

shower room into the equipment room.

2. Any additional required clothing and equipment previously

deposited in the equipment room is put on. When work

area is too cold for coveralls only, the worker will

provide himself with additional warm garments to be worn

over the disposable clothing.

3. These must be treated as contaminated clothing and left

in the decontamination unit. Under no circumstances

shall a worker enter the work area without having a

respirator and protective clothing on.

4. Worker proceeds to work area and performs whatever work

is to be done.

5. Before leaving the work area, the workers shall remove

all gross contamination and debris from the coveralls

using a vacuum with a high efficiency particulate

absolute (HEPA) filter. In practice this is usually

carried out by one worker assisting another.

6. The worker proceeds to equipment room and removes all

clothing except approved respirators. Extra work

clothing and footwear must be stored here. Disposable

coveralls are placed in a bag for disposal as asbestos

material.

7. The worker then proceeds directly into the shower room.

Respirators shall be taken off last to prevent inhalation

of fiber during removal of contaminated clothing and

shall not be removed until they have been washed free of

dust.

8. After showering, the worker moves to the clean room and

dresses in street clothing prior to exiting.

9. Respirators are picked up, washed thoroughly, and

disinfected as required by OSHA Regulations 29 CFR

1910.134, wrapped and stored in the clean room.

F. Filters in dual cartridge type respirators shall be removed,

wetted and discarded as asbestos contaminated waste. A new

filter shall be in place in the respirator prior to reuse.

For powered air purifying respirators or supplied air

respirators, the manufacturer shall be consulted about the

proper decontamination sequence.




G. There shall be no smoking, eating, or drinking in any

contaminated areas (Shower Room, Equipment Room and Work Area)

or in the clean room. Respirators shall be worn in all

contaminated areas.

H. Non-disposable work footwear shall remain inside the

contaminated area until completion of the job and shall be

disposed of as asbestos waste or shall be thoroughly

decontaminated before removal.

I. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that all

employees follow the appropriate procedures, including the

decontamination procedures listed in Subpart C. Employees who

repeatedly violate proper procedures shall be subject to

disciplinary measures by the Contractor, including dismissal

if necessary.

4.4 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee, in writing, that all asbestos

within this scope of work has been removed, the work area is

free of asbestos and asbestos dust, and disposal of all

asbestos waste was performed to the complete satisfaction of

the requirements of this specification, the Owner, the US EPA,

OSHA, NJ DCA, NJ DOH, NJ DOL, NJ DEP and any other government

agency and/or authority having jurisdiction.




REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF PCB BULK PRODUCT 028433- 1

SECTION 02 84 33 – REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF PCB BULK PRODUCT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:


General and Supplementary Conditions, Architectural Drawings

and Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. A

Hazardous Materials Survey Report has been prepared and

provided to the Owner for the work identified in this

specification.


exact quantities and locations of all PCBs. The College of

New Jersey (TCNJ) and/or Brinkerhoff Environmental Services,

Inc. (Brinkerhoff) assume no responsibility for the accuracy

of quantities and/or descriptions of materials, or the

accuracy of descriptions of existing conditions. The

Contractor shall perform the following work as described

herein.

C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

General and Supplementary Conditions, Drawings and

Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Removal and Disposal of PCB Bulk Product: The work of this

project includes the removal of designated EPA-Regulated PCB

containing materials:

Suspect Material Description Quantity PCB (mg/kg)

Metallic Silver Caulking Associated

with Air Handler Duct Wall Penetration 30 LF 88.2

Legend: mg/kg = milligram/kilogram, LF = linear feet

B. The Contractor shall be aware of all conditions of the Project

and is responsible for verifying quantities and locations of

all PCBs and Work to be performed. Failure to do so shall not

relieve the Contractor of its obligation to furnish all labor

and materials necessary to perform the Work.

C. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the

Project Documents and all governing codes, rules, and




regulations. Where conflicts occur between the Project

Documents and applicable codes, rules, and regulations, the

more stringent shall apply.

D. Working hours shall be as required and approved by the Owner.

PCB material removal activities including, but not limited to,

work area preparation, gross removal activities, cleaning

activities, waste removal, etc. may need to be performed

during ‘off-hours’ (including nights and weekends). In

addition, multiple mobilizations may be required to perform

the work identified in this project. The Contractor shall

coordinate and schedule all Work with the Owner.

1.3 SPECIAL JOB CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall not interfere with the daily activities

within the remainder of the building or otherwise affect daily

school operations.

1.4 PERMITS AND COMPLIANCE

A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability

for compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and local

laws, rules, and regulations pertaining to Work practices,

protection of Workers, authorized visitors to the site,

persons, and property adjacent to the Work.

B. Perform PCB related Work in accordance with 40 CFR 761, and 29

CFR 1926, as specified herein. Where more stringent

requirements are specified, adhere to the more stringent

requirements.

C. The Contractor must maintain current licenses or registrations

pursuant to EPA regulations for all Work related to this

Project, including the removal, handling, transport, and

disposal of hazardous and industrial waste.

D. The Contractor shall obtain an EPA Facility ID number if a

number cannot be provided by the Owner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit copies of the documents listed

below to the Owner and Environmental Consultant for review and




approval prior to the commencement of PCB abatement

activities:

1. Progress Schedule:

a. Show the complete sequence of PCB ballast removal

activities and the sequencing of Work within each

building or building section.

b. Show the dates for the beginning and completion of

each major element of Work including substantial

completion dates for each Work Area, building, or

phase.

2. PCB Removal Work Plan: Provide plans that clearly

indicate the following:

a. All Work Areas/containments numbered sequentially.

b. Locations and types of all decontamination

enclosures.

c. Entrances and exits to the Work Areas/containments.

d. Type of abatement activity/technique for each Work

Area/containment.

e. Proposed location and construction of storage

facilities and field office.

f. Location of water and electrical connections to

building services.

g. Waste transport routes through the building to the

waste storage container.

h. Disposal Site/Landfill Permit from applicable

regulatory agency.

i. Letter identifying the presence of PCB bulk product

waste, with Acknowledgement by the landfill. See

section 4.01.A.

j. New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection

Waste Transporter Permit.

B. Project Close-out Submittals: Within 30 days after project

completion, the Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the

documents listed below to the Environmental Consultant for

review and approval prior to the Contractor’s final payment.

1. Originals of all waste disposal manifests, seals, and

disposal logs.

2. Daily progress log, including the entry/exit log.




3. A list of all Workers used in the performance of the

Project, including name and social security number.

4. For each Worker used in the performance of the Project,

submit the Worker’s Acknowledgment Statement.

5. Disposal Site/Landfill Permit from applicable regulatory

agency.

6. Copy of PCB notification with acknowledgement from the

disposal facility/landfill.

1.6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

A. The Contractor shall comply with the following codes and

standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown

or specified:

B. Federal Regulations:

1. 29 CFR 1910.1200, "Hazard Communication" (OSHA)

2. 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection" (OSHA)

3. 29 CFR 1910.145, "Specification for Accident Prevention

Signs and Tags" (OSHA)

4. 29 CFR 1926, "Construction Industry" (OSHA)

5. 29 CFR 1926.500 "Guardrails, Handrails and Covers" (OSHA)

6. 40 CFR 761, “PART 761—Polychlorinated Biphenyls

7. 49 CFR 171-173, Transportation Standards (DOT)

C. Standards and Guidance Documents:

1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) Z88.2-80,

Practices for Respiratory Protection

2. ANSI Z9.2-79, Fundamentals Governing the Design and

Operation of Local Exhaust Systems

1.7 PROJECT MONITORING

A. The Environmental Consultant shall serve as Owner’s

representative in regard to the performance of the PCB Removal

Project and provide direction as required throughout the

entire abatement Project period.

B. The Contractor is required to ensure cooperation of its

personnel with the Environmental Consultant Inc for project




monitoring functions described in this section. The

Contractor shall comply with all direction given by the

Environmental Consultant during the course of the Project.

C. The Environmental Consultant Inc shall provide the following

administrative services:

1. Review and approve or disapprove all submittals, shop

drawings, schedules, and testing.

2. Review and approve the Contractor's compliance testing

laboratory.

3. The Owner may, at its discretion, may elect to conduct

air sampling. If air samples collected during removal

indicate any airborne PCB concentration(s) above the OSHA

PEL of 0.5 mg/m3, work shall be stopped immediately and

Work methods shall be altered to reduce the airborne PCB

concentration(s).

1.8 PROJECT SUPERVISOR

A. The Contractor shall designate a full-time Project Supervisor

and Workers who shall meet the following qualifications:

1. The Project Supervisor shall be trained in PCB removal

and hazardous waste management in accordance with the

Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response

Standard (HAZWOPER), 29 CFR 1910.120 and CFR 1926.65with

29 CFR 1910.120 and CFR 1926.65.

2. The Project Supervisor shall have a minimum of three

years’ experience as a supervisor.

3. The Project Supervisor must be able to read and write

English fluently, as well as communicate in the primary

language of all Workers.

4. If the Project Supervisor is not on-site at any time

whatsoever, all Work shall be stopped. The Project

Supervisor shall remain on-site until the Project is

complete.

5. The Project Supervisor shall be responsible for the

performance of the Work and shall represent the

Contractor in all respects at the Project site.




1.9 TRAINING

A. As required by applicable regulations, prior to assignment to

PCB Work instruct each employee with regard to the hazards of

PCB, safety and health precautions, and the use and

requirements of protective clothing and equipment.

B. Establish a respirator program as required by ANSI Z88.2 and

29 CFR 1910.134. Provide respirator training and fit testing.

C. Workers performing all work described in Section 02-84-00

shall be trained in accordance with the Hazardous Waste

Operations and Emergency Response Standard (HAZWOPER), 29 CFR

1910.120 and CFR 1926.65.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SIGNS AND LABELS, CONTAINERS

A. Provide warning signs and barrier tapes at all approaches to

PCB Work Areas. Locate signs at such distance that personnel

may read the sign and take the necessary protective steps

required before entering the area.

B. Provide the appropriate “Large PCB Marking” or “Small PCB

Marking” (ML or MS per 40 CFR 761) as shown below, of

sufficient size to be clearly legible, for display on waste

containers (bags, boxes, rolloffs or drums) which will be used

to contain or transport PCB contaminated material, in

accordance with 40 CFR 761. In addition, U.S. Department of

Transportation (DOT) 49 CFR Parts 171 and 172 requires the

name and UN number of the material to be on the bags or drums,

and, if shipped in bulk (rolloffs, Gaylord boxes, etc) the

bulk container must also be labeled: Polychlorinated biphenyl,

solid mixture UN 3432.




ML

MS

C. The PCB materials must have a label stating the following on

each container:

HAZARDOUS WASTE--Federal Law Prohibits Improper Disposal. If found,

contact the nearest police or public safety authority, or the U.S.

Environmental Protection Agency.

Generator's Name and Address__________________________________

Generator's EPA Identification Number___________________________

Manifest Tracking Number _____________________________________

D. Provide 6 mil polyethylene disposal bags with PCB caution

labels.

1. The “Small PCB Label” (MS per 40 CFR 761) may be used as

shown above. Bags shall also be labeled with U.S. DOT

required markings per 49 CFR 172, Polychlorinated

biphenyl, solid mixture UN 3432.




2. Labeled PCB waste containers or bags shall not be used

for non-PCB waste or trash. Any material placed in

labeled containers or bags, whether turned inside out or

not shall be handled and disposed of as PCB waste.

2.2 DAILY PROJECT LOG

A. Provide a Daily Project Log. The log shall contain on title

page the Project name, name, address and phone number of

Owner; name, address and phone number of Environmental

Consultant; name, address and phone number of Abatement

Contractor; emergency numbers including, but not limited to

local Fire/Rescue department and all other New York State

Department of Labor requirements.

B. All entries into the log shall be made in non-washable,

permanent ink and such pen shall be strung to or otherwise

attached to the log to prevent removal from the log-in area.

Under no circumstances shall pencil entries be permitted.

C. All persons entering and exiting the Work Area shall sign the

log and include name, social security number, and time.

D. The Project Supervisor shall document all Work performed daily

and note all inspections.

2.3 SHIPPING CONTAINERS AND PACKAGING

A. Provide packaging in accordance with 49 CFR 173 Packaging

Group 9, such as 30 or 55 gallon capacity fiber, plastic, or

metal drums, Gaylord Boxes or other Intermediate Bulk

Containers (IBCs), or non-siftable bulk containers, capable of

being sealed air and water tight if PCB waste has the

potential to damage or puncture disposal bags. Affix PCB

caution labels on lids of drums, and opposite sides of drums

or bulk containers, as well as the ends of bulk containers.

2.4 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. All dry vacuuming performed under this contract shall be

performed with High Efficiency Particulate Absolute (HEPA)

filter equipped industrial vacuums conforming to ANSI Z9.2.




B. Any power tools used to drill, cut into, or otherwise disturb

PCB material shall be manufacturer equipped with HEPA filtered

local exhaust ventilation.

C. All polyethylene (plastic) sheeting used on the Project

(including but not limited to sheeting used for critical and

isolation barriers, fixed objects, walls, floors, ceilings,

waste container) shall be at least 6 mil fire retardant

sheeting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REMOVAL OF PCB MATERIALS - GENERAL

A. PCB-containing materials shall be removed in accordance with

the Contract Documents and the approved PCB Work Plan.

B. Non-PCB items such as windows, doors, masonry, and all other

building construction and components from which PCB materials

are removed shall be decontaminated using a double wash-rinse

technique as specified in 40 CFR 761, Subpart S, as follows:

1. First wash. Cover the surface with organic solvent in

which PCBs are soluble to 5% by weight or more. Scrub

rough surfaces with scrubbing pad and solvent such that

the entire surface is very wet for 1 minute. Wipe smooth

surfaces with a solvent-soaked absorbent pad also for 1

minute. Absorb solvent until no visible traces remain.

2. First rinse. Wet the surface with clean rinse solvent

such that the entire surface is very wet for 1 minute.

Drain and contain the solvent from the surface. Wipe the

residual solvent off the drained surface using a clean,

disposable absorbent pad until no liquid is visible on

the surface.

3. Second wash. Repeat the procedures in paragraph (1) of

this section. The rinse solvent from the first rinse

(paragraph (2) of this section) may be used.

4. Second rinse. Repeat the procedures in paragraph (2) of

this section.

C. Mechanical cutting or grinding of PCB materials is not

permitted.

D. All PCB waste must be located at or near the point of

generation, under the control of the Project Supervisor. Up to




55 gallons may be stored at the point of generation for an

indefinite period, but any more than 55 gallons must be moved

within 3 days to a Container Storage Area (CSA) as specified

in 6 NYCRR Section 372.2 “Standards Applicable to Generators

of Hazardous Waste”, or off site.

E. The CSA and personnel managing it must meet the following

requirements:

1. The containers must be dated when placed in storage, and

accumulation times must be observed

2. A label stating "Hazardous Waste" must identify all areas

and containers used to accumulate hazardous waste

F. Closure of the CSA. If an EPA ID number and CSA were created

specifically for the PCB removal work, the Contractor must

also close out the CSA and notify the Owner and Environmental

Consultant, and all applicable regulatory agencies that the

hazardous waste activity has concluded.

PART 4 - DISPOSAL OF PCB WASTE

4.1 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL SITE

A. For any permitted out-of-state landfill not specifically

authorized for disposal of PCBs, written notice must be

provided 15 days prior to the first shipment of the same waste

stream that the waste may contain PCBs greater than 50ppm, in

accordance with 40 CFR 761.62. The letter shall be

acknowledged via a disposal facility representative’s

signature, printed name and title.

NOTE: NEW JERSEY STATE LANDFILLS MUST BE SPECIFICALLY

AUTHORIZED TO ACCEPT PCBs.

B. The Contractor shall give twenty-four (24) hour notification

prior to removing any waste from the site. Waste shall be

removed from the site only during normal working hours unless

otherwise specified.

4.2 Hazardous WASTE MANIFESTS

A. A PCB Hazardous Waste Manifest shall be completed by the

Contractor for each PCB Waste Shipment.




B. The Manifest shall have the appropriate signatures (the

Generator) and the Hauler representative prior to any waste

being removed from the site.

C. Copies of the completed Manifest shall be provided to the

Owner and Environmental Consultant and shall remain on site

for inspection.

D. Upon arrival at the Disposal Site, the Manifest shall be

signed by the Disposal Facility operator to certify receipt of

PCB materials covered by the manifest.

E. Originals of all waste disposal manifests, and disposal logs

shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner and

Environmental Consultant with the final close-out

documentation.




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork,

reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement

procedures, and finishes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in

combination with one or more of the following: blended

hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and

silica fume; materials subject to compliance with

requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious

materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the

Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Submit Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix

design test.

C. Material certifications in lieu of material laboratory test

reports when permitted by engineer. Material certificates

shall be signed by manufacturer and contractor, certifying

that each material item complies with or exceeds specified

requirements. Provide certification from admixture

manufacturer that chloride content complies with specification

requirements.




D. Copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any adhesives

and other hazardous materials.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on

Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork

Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-

certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in

manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies

with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities

and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's

"Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production

Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent

agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,

qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing

indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as

ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according

to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-

certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and

Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing

agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified

Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel

according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.

E. Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade and formed-surface panels

to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture,

tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship.

1. Build panel approximately 200 sq. ft. for slab-on-grade

and 100 sq. ft. for formed surface in the location

indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Owner and

Engineer.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups

may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.




1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing

agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete

mixtures.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows.

Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength

that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low

temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall

below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain

delivered concrete mixture temperature within the

temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice

or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on

subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials

containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators

unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture

designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of

placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be

used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of

ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using

liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just

before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist

without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-

framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type

materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed

surfaces.




1. Use overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard

PS-1 “A-C or B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form”,

Class I.

2. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 “B-

B (Concrete Form) Plywood” Class I, Exterior Grade or

better, mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each piece

bearing legible inspection trademark.

B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal,

or another acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at

least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form

release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic

compounds (VOCS) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely

affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent

treatments of concrete surfaces.

D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable

or snap-off metal form ties designed to prevent form

deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal.

Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2

inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface.

1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not

larger than 1 inch in diameter in the concrete surface.

2.2 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301.

2. ACI 117.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or ASTM C1157, Type

LH or GU.

a. Use one brand of cement throughout the Project

unless otherwise specified.

b. Do not re-use cement which has partially set or

hardened.

B. Fly Ash:




1. Permitted in drilled piers, footings, pier caps, pile

caps, columns, walls, grade beams only.

2. ASTM C 618, Class C or F, except maximum loss on

ignition: 6%. Maximum percent retained on #325 sieve:

28%. Maximum water requirement, stated as percentage of

control: 100%.

3. Testing: ASTM C311.

4. Percentage of fly ash in mix design shall be by weight,

not by volume. Water/cement ratio will be calculated as

water/cementitious (total cement and fly ash) ratio.

5. Prohibited: Fly ash in same mix with Type IP blended

cement.

6. If strength or air content varies from value specified by

more than specified tolerances, Engineer or designated

representative shall reject that concrete.

7. The total fly ash contained in concrete should not be

more than 20% of total cementitious materials by weight

8. Submit all fly ash concrete mix designs per ACI 301.

C. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag (GG BFS):

1. ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or higher.

2. Percentage of GGBF slag in mix design shall be by weight,

not by volume. Water-cement ratio shall be calculated as

water-cementitious (total Portland cement + GGBF slag)

ratio.

3. If strength or air content varies from value specified by

more than specified tolerances, Engineer or designated

representative shall reject that concrete.

4. Total fly ash and slag contained in concrete should not

be more than 30% of total cementitious materials by

weight.

5. Submit all GGBF slag concrete mix designs per ACI 301.

D. Aggregates:

1. Normal weight aggregates: Aggregates shall be crushed

stone or gravel complying with ASTM C 33, uniform

throughout the work, with fineness modulus not varying by

more than 0.15 either way from approved samples; maximum

size of coarse aggregate particles shall be ½ inch for

slabs on grade and 1” for other concrete. Use in all




foundations, slabs on grade, walls, steps, pits, mats,

etc.

2. Fine aggregates: Natural sand conforming to ASTM C33.

3. Combined aggregate gradation for slabs and other

designated concrete shall be 8% - 18% for large top size

aggregates (1½ in.) or 8% - 22% for smaller top size

aggregates (1 in. or ¾ in.) retained on each sieve below

the top size and above the No. 100.

E. Water: Potable.

2.4 CONCRETE MIXING

1. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C

94, and as specified.

2. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F,

reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75

minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F,

reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according

to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic

loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until

structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of

size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated,

within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete

mortar.

D. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying

against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates

where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top

forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1

vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for

easy removal.




2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

E. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for

slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished

concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed

strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

F. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports

where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close

openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely

braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary

openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

G. Do not chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently

exposed concrete.

H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets,

blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work.

Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such

items.

I. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove

chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before

placing concrete.

J. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as

required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper

alignment.

K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent,

according to manufacturer's written instructions, before

placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items

required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported

by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,

diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to

be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations

required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of

AISC 303.

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive

through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at




exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf

angles, and other conditions.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for

fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and

reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice,

and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against

displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar

supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld

crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward

exposed concrete surfaces.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces

perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of

concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as

approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement.

Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless

otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement

through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2

inches into concrete.

3.5 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at

other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install

in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed

waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints

in waterstops according to manufacturer's written

instructions.




3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork,

reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that

required inspections are completed.

B. Comply with ACI 304, “Guide for Measuring, Mixing,

Transporting, and Placing Concrete” and as specified.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by

form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and

patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed

specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by

form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical

manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and

defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed

specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Bases: Provide machine and equipment bases and

foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for

machines and equipment to template at correct elevations,

complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer

furnishing machines and equipment.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying

and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1

for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather

protection during curing.




STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes structural steel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as

classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for

Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections

required by the Contract Documents to be selected or

completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand

loads indicated and comply with other information and

restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic

details where indicated and AISC 360.

2. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel

components. Submit signed and sealed connection

calculations and Connection Standards along with shop

drawings. Connections not specifically detailed on the

Contract Drawings are to be designed under the direct

supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer,

licensed in the Project jurisdiction, specializing in

structural steel engineering




a. Indicate profiles, spacing and locations of

members, including:

1) Fabrication details.

2) Size and weight of members.

3) Location of shop and field connections.

4) Locations and details of anchors,

base/bearing plates and leveling plates.

5) Details of holes, cuts, camber and splices.

6) Layout and location of composite shear studs.

7) Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical,

direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing

connections.

b. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.1 and A2.4

symbols distinguishing between shop and field

welds; and show size, length and type of each

weld.

c. Provide setting drawings, templates and

directions for installation of anchor bolts and

other anchorage to be installed as work by other

sections.

d. Obtain detailed drawings of the Work by other

trades including locations and sizes of openings

in roofs and the Work requiring holes in

structural steel, mounting brackets, and supports

attached to the structural steel.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator

and testing agency.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical

and physical properties.

F. Source quality-control reports.

1.5 CONNECTION DESIGN AND MEMBER DETAILING

A. Member Detailing and Design of Connections: Details shown

are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions,




unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site

without causing delay in the work.

B. Design connections as “Framed Beam Connections: in accord-

ance with Part 4 of the AISC Manual, except as otherwise

indicated.

1. For noncomposite beams, reaction shall be end reaction on member, as defined in the AISC “Uniform Loaded Beam

Tables”, or reaction shown on the Drawings, whichever

is greater.

2. Single sided connections for spandrel beams are not

acceptable.

3. Bolts: A325 or A490. Connections may be designed

using Type N Bolts, except at hanger connections and

where slip-critical connections shall be used.

C. Shop and Field Connections:

1. Shop connections are to be welded unless indicated

otherwise on the Drawings.

2. Bolt field connections with high-strength bolts except where welded connections or other connections are

indicated.

3. Bolts: 3/4 inch diameter minimum. 4. Fillet welds: 1/4 inch minimum, unless otherwise

noted.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in

structural steel fabrication having a minimum of 5 years

documented, successful experience with work comparable to

the Work of this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years documented,

successful experience with work comparable to the Work of

this Project.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel

according to AWS D1.1-2015" Structural Welding Code -

Steel."




D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following

specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.

2. AISC 360.

3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using

ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

1.7 TEMPORARY BRACING

A. The steel erector/contractor is responsible for the de-

sign, strength, adequacy, safety and means and methods of

construction of shoring and temporary bracing of Structur-

al Steel Work at all stages of erection, until such time

that permanent members and construction are in place and

final connections are completed.


A. Field verify all existing measurements and elevations pri-

or to beginning fabrication process. Engineer will not

review or take responsibility for any existing dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work which

will be exposed to view, use only materials which are

smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting,

rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade

names and roughness in accordance with the AISC

“Specifications for Architecturally Exposed Structural

Steel”. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding

and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application

of surface finishes.

B. Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A 992 or ASTM A572

C. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36 or

ASTM A 572, Grade 50.




D. Structural Steel Tubing:

1. Cold-Formed: ASTM A 500, Grade B. 2. Hot-Formed: ASTM A501.

E. Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B.

F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:

1. Unheaded Rods: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M). 2. Unheaded Rods: ASTM A 572, Grade 50 (ASTM A 572M,

Grade 345).

3. Anchor Rods: ASTM A307 or ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or Grade 55, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated.

4. Standard threaded fasteners:

a. Plain washers: ANSI B27.2, Type A.

b. Beveled washers: ANSI B27.4.

c. Nuts and bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A.

5. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Quenched and

tempered medium-carbon steel.

a. Bolts: Heavy hexagon ASTM A325.

b. Nuts: Heavy hexagon ASTM A563, Grade DH.

c. Washers: Hardened ASTM F436.

(1) beveled at channel flanges

6. Direct Tension Indicator Fasteners: Load indicator

washers to conform to ASTM F959, or tension control

bolts may be used.

G. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code.

7. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1-1; type required for

materials being welded.

H. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Fabricator’s standard lead

and chromate-free, nanasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer.

8. Where faying surfaces of slip-critical joints are

permitted by Architect to be painted, provide Class A

paint (providing a minimum slip coefficient of 0.33)

in accordance with Test Method to Determine Slip

Coefficient for Coatings used in Bolted Joints, in

Appendix A of the RCSC Specification for Structural




Joints. Manufacturer’s certification shall include a

certified copy of the test report.

I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint

for regalvanizing welds and repair painting galvanized

steel, complying with Military Specifications DOD-P-21035

(Ships) or SSPC-Paint-20.

2.1 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to

greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's

"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and

Bridges" and AISC 360.

B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended

by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end

welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to

AWS D1.1-2015 and manufacturer's written instructions.

2.2 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts

according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints

Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type

of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened for all gravity only

members, slip critical for all braced bay and wind

girts members.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1-15 for tolerances,

appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld

quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.3 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend

priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2

inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded.




3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical

connections.

4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials

(applied fireproofing).

5. Beam flanges to receive shear studs.

6. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted.

Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or

flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the

following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply

primer according to manufacturer's written instructions

and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry

film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming

methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,

edges, and exposed surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of braces

surfaces and locations for compliance with requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to

elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and

AISC 360.

B. Base Leveling Plates and Base Plates: Clean concrete- and

masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and

roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom

surface of plates.




1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or

setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have

been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or

shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of

plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces

and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed

surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with

manufacturer's written installation instructions for

shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within

AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and

Bridges."

3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts

according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints

Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type

of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug Tightened for gravity only members

and Slip critical for wind girts and braced bay

members or any members subject to tension.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1-15 for tolerances,

appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld

quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing,

alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and

removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent

testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and

high-strength bolted connections].




B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and

inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually

inspected according to AWS D1.1-15.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and

inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract

Documents.



ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTIONJanuary 15, 2018

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053-1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.

2. Plywood backing panels

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-

fabricated product. Indicate component materials and

dimensions and include construction and application

details.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated wood.

2. Power-driven fasteners.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading

agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated,

provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules

of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board

of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified

by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber

under the rules indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless

otherwise indicated.




2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1;

Use Category UC2.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or

chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture

content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is

warped or does not comply with requirements for

untreated material.

C. Mark lumber w ith treatment quality mark of an

inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless


2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and

lumber for support or attachment of other construction,

including the following:

1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

3. Cants.

B. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent

maximum moisture content and any of the following

species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.

3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.

4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade;

WCLIB or WWPA.

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D

Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated,

not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.




2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated

that comply with requirements specified in this article

for material and manufacture.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002,

length as recommended by screw manufacturer for

material being fastened.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with

members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit

carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as

needed for accurate fit.

B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed

adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible

flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details

for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless


D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs;

coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing

panels.

E. Do not splice structural members between supports

unless otherwise indicated.

F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut

surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by

anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with

the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's

International Building Code.




3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural

Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate

Attachments," in ICC's International Residential

Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron

(SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic

boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered

borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to

comply with EPA-registered label.




PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 070150-1

SECTION 070150 - PREPARATION FOR REROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Full tear-off of entire roof.

2. Removal of base flashings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and

glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing

Manual" apply to work of this Section.

B. Roof Re-Cover Preparation: Existing roofing system is to

remain and be prepared for new roof installed over it.

C. Full Roof Tear-Off: Removal of existing roofing system

from deck.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Temporary Roofing Submittal: Product data and description

of temporary roofing system. If temporary roof remains in

place, include surface preparation requirements needed to

receive permanent roof, and submit a letter from roofing

manufacturer, stating acceptance of the temporary roof and

that its inclusion does not adversely affect the roofing

system's resistance to fire and wind.


A. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of

adjoining construction and site improvements, including

exterior and interior finish surfaces,that might be

misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing

operations. Submit before Work begins.





A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by warrantor of

existing roofing system to work on existing roofing.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below

reroofing area. Conduct reroofing so Owner's operations

are not disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than 72

hours' notice of activities that may affect Owner's

operations.

1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner

can place protective dust and water-leakage covers

over sensitive equipment and furnishings, shut down

HVAC and fire-alarm or -detection equipment if needed,

and evacuate occupants from below work area.

2. Before working over structurally impaired areas of

deck, notify Owner to evacuate occupants from below

affected area. Verify that occupants below work area

have been evacuated before proceeding with work over

impaired deck area.

B. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings,

walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and

landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing

operations.

C. Maintain safe, unimpeded, and protected access to existing

walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used

facilities.

D. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation

only when existing and forecasted weather conditions

permit Work to proceed without water entering existing

roofing system or building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INFILL AND REPLACEMENT MATERIALS

A. Use infill materials matching existing roofing system

materials unless otherwise indicated.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Shut off rooftop utilities and service piping before

beginning the Work.

B. Protect existing roofing system that is not to be

reroofed.

C. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air-intake equipment in

the vicinity of the Work. Cover air-intake louvers before

proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor

air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork.

D. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure

roof drainage at end of each workday. Prevent debris from

entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roof-

drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove

roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is

taking place, or when rain is forecast.

3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF

A. General: Notify Owner each day of extent of roof tear-off

proposed for that day.

B. Remove pavers and accessories from roofing.

C. Full Roof Tear-Off: Where indicated, remove existing

roofing and other roofing system components down to the

deck.

1. Bitumen and felts that are firmly bonded to concrete

decks are permitted to remain if felts are dry. Remove

unadhered bitumen, unadhered felts, and wet felts.

2. Remove excess asphalt from steel deck. A maximum of 15

lb/100 sq. ft. of asphalt is permitted to remain on

steel decks.

3. Remove fasteners from deck or cut fasteners off

slightly above deck surface.

D. Partial Roof Tear-Off (Alternate No. 1): Where indicated

Appendix A of Project Manual, remove existing roofing and

immediately check for presence of moisture by visually

observing substrate that is to remain.




1. Bitumen and felts that are firmly bonded to concrete

decks are permitted to remain if felts are dry. Remove

unadhered bitumen, unadhered felts, and wet felts.

2. Remove excess asphalt from steel deck that is exposed

by removal of wet or damp materials. A maximum of 15

lb/100 sq. ft. of asphalt is permitted to remain on

steel decks.

3. Remove fasteners from deck.

3.3 DECK PREPARATION

A. Inspect deck after tear-off of roofing system.

B. If broken or loose fasteners that secure deck panels to

one another or to structure are observed, or if deck

appears or feels inadequately attached, immediately notify

Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed

by Architect.

C. If deck surface is unsuitable for receiving new roofing or

if structural integrity of deck is suspect, immediately

notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until

directed by Architect.

3.4 INFILL MATERIALS INSTALLATION

A. Immediately after roof tear-off, and inspection and

repair, if needed, of deck, fill in tear-off areas to

match existing roofing system construction.

B. Install new roofing patch over roof infill area. If new

roofing is installed the same day tear-off is made,

roofing patch is not required.

3.5 BASE FLASHING REMOVAL

A. Remove existing base flashings. Clean substrates of

contaminants, such as asphalt, sheet materials, dirt, and

debris.

B. Do not damage metal counterflashings that are to remain.

Replace metal counterflashings damaged during removal with

counterflashings of same metal, weight or thickness, and

finish.




C. When directed by Architect, replace parapet framing, wood

blocking, curbs, and nailers to comply with Section 061053

Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."

3.6 DISPOSAL

A. Collect demolished materials and place in containers.

Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow

demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

B. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off

Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 070150 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING



METAL WALL PANELS 074213-1

SECTION 074213 - METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes metal composite material wall panels.



B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts

of metal composite material panels; details of edge

conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages,

attachment assembly, trim, flashings, closures, and

accessories; and special details.

C. Samples: For each type of metal composite material panel

indicated.


A. Product test reports.

B. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers

and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal

composite material panel systems that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.




1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial

Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard

form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace

metal composite material panels that show evidence of

deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified

warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of

Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS

A. Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory-

formed and -assembled, metal composite material wall panels

fabricated from two metal facings that are bonded to a solid,

extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for

installation method indicated. Include attachment assemblies

components, panel stiffeners, and accessories required for

weathertight system.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or

comparable product approved equal by the Architect.

B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch-

thick, anodized aluminum sheet facings.

1. Panel Thickness: 0.236 inch.

2. Core: Standard.

3. Exterior Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's

full range.

C. Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from extruded

aluminum.

D. Attachment Assembly: Manufacturer's standard.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-

formed, metallic-coated steel sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90

coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6971&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd




aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise

indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as

required for support and alignment of metal composite

material panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a

complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings,

fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings,

sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar

items. Match material and finish of metal composite material

panels unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same

material as metal composite material panels as required to

seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.

Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips,

sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes,

fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish

flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal

composite material panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand

design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching

color of metal composite material panels by means of plastic

caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing

washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by

metal composite material panel manufacturer. Provide sealant

types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with

panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel

finish.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels

and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard

procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated

performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing.

Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and

structural requirements.

B. Fabricate metal composite material panel joints with factory-

installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a

weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and

that minimize noise from movements.

C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to

comply with manufacturer's recommendations and




recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other

characteristics of item indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and

other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages

according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel

manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly

required to support metal composite material wall panels and

to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including

subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels,

panel clips, and anchor channels.

1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery,

panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery, and panel-system

joint seals.

B. Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to

supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners

recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance

requirements specified.

1. Wet Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints

between adjacent metal composite material wall panels

with sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant backing

and sealant according to requirements specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

2. Dry Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints

between adjacent metal composite materialwall panels with

manufacturer's standard gasket system.

3. Rainscreen Systems: Do not apply sealants to joints


C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive

anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide

for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings

and other components.

D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements,

manufacturer's written installation instructions, and




SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide

concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to

line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,

and seams that are permanently watertight.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films,

if any, as metal composite material panels are installed,

unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written

installation instructions. On completion of metal composite

material panel installation, clean finished surfaces as

recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer.

Maintain in a clean condition during construction.




THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075400-1

SECTION 075400 – THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes 1. Thermoplastic Polyolefin Single-Ply Roofing Membrane

2. Thermoplastic Polyolefin Flashings

3. Thermoplastic Polyolefin Accessories

4. Insulation

B. Related Sections 1.Section 061053: Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

2.Section 076200: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Annual Book of ASTM Standards

1. ASTM D-751 – Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics 2. ASTM D-2137 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property—Brittleness Point of Flexible Polymers and Coated Fabrics

3. ASTM E-96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor

Transmission of Materials

4. ASTM D1204 - Standard Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of Nonrigid Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at

Elevated Temperature

5. ASTM D-471 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Effect of Liquids

6. ASTM D-1149 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber

Deterioration—Cracking in an Ozone Controlled Environment

7. ASTM C-1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a

Portable Solar Reflectometer

8. ASTM C-1371 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance of Materials Near Room Temperature Using

Portable Emissometers

9. ASTM G155 - Standard Practice For Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus For Exposure Of Non-Metallic Materials

10. ASTM D573 - Standard Test Method For Rubber -

Deterioration In An Air Oven

B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National

Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - Architectural Sheet

Metal Manual

C. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA)




D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

E. U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) 1. Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED)

F. Factory Mutual (FM Global) - Approval Guide

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - Roofing Systems and

Materials Guide (TGFU R1306)

H. California Title 24 Energy Efficient Standards

I. ENERGY STAR J. Cool Roofing Rating Council (CRRC)

K. Miami-Dade County

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 and the glossary of the National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA)

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual for definitions of roofing

terms related to this section.

1.04 LEED CERTICICATION

A. Provide a roofing system that will achieve or aid in the qualification of points satisfying

1. Sustainable Site credit 7.2 - Heat Island Effect - Roof. 2. Materials & Resource credit 4 - Recycled Content. 3. Materials & Resource credit 5 - Local and Regional

Materials.

4. Indoor Air Quality credit 4.1 - Low-Emitting Materials - Adhesives and Sealants.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide product data sheets for each type of product indicated in this section.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide manufacturers standard details and approved shop drawings for the roof system specified.

C. Samples: Provide samples of insulations, fasteners,

membrane materials and accessories for verification of

quality.

D. Certificates: Installer shall provide written

documentation from the manufacturer of their authorization




to install the roof system, and eligibility to obtain the

warranty specified in this section.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Contractor shall provide a roofing system that meets or exceeds all criteria listed in

this section.

B. Source Limitations: All components listed in this section shall be provided by a single manufacturer or approved by

the primary roofing manufacturer.

C. Final Inspection

Manufacturer’s representative shall provide a comprehensive

final inspection after completion of the roof system. All

application errors must be addressed and final punch list

completed.

1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Prior to scheduled commencement of the roofing installation and associated work, conduct a meeting at the project site

with the installer, architect, owner, Contractor

representative and any other persons directly involved with

the performance of the work. The installer shall record

conference discussions to include decisions and agreements

reached (or disagreements), and furnish copies of recorded

discussions to each attending party. The main purpose of

this meeting is to review foreseeable methods and

procedures related to roofing work.


A. Provide an installed roofing membrane and base flashing system that does not permit the passage of water, and will

withstand the design pressures calculated in accordance

with the most current revision of ASCE 7.

B. Contractor shall provide all primary roofing materials that are physically and chemically compatible when installed in

accordance with manufacturers current application

requirements.

C. Heat Aging

1. Test Method D573. Age sheet specimens for 150 days at 275°F. After exposure, the specimens shall be removed,




wrapped around a 3 inch mandrel, and inspected for cracks

and crazing. A specimen is rated “pass” if no cracks or

crazing is observed.

D. Weather Resistance: 1. Test Method G151 and G155, using conditions detailed in ASTM D6878 except that the radiant exposure should be

40,320 kJ/m2.nm at 340 nm (i.e. 4 times the D6878

standard). After exposure, the specimens shall be

removed, wrapped around a 3 inch mandrel, and inspected

for cracks and crazing. A specimen is rated “pass” if no

cracks or crazing is observed.

1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. All work shall be performed in a safe, professional manner, conforming to all federal, state and local codes.

B. Provide a system that meets FM Class 1-195 in the field of the roof. FM RoofNav assembly # 334717-0-0.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver all roofing materials to the site in original containers, with factory seals intact.

B. Store all pail goods in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry location within their specified temperature

range.

C. Do not expose materials to moisture in any form before, during, or after delivery to the site. Reject delivery of

materials that show evidence of contact with moisture.

D. Remove manufacturer supplied plastic covers from materials provided with such. Use “breathable” type covers such as

canvas tarpaulins to allow venting and protection from

weather and moisture. Cover and protect materials at the

end of each work day. Do not remove any protective

tarpaulins until immediately before the material will be

installed.

E. Materials shall be stored above 55°F (12.6°C) a minimum of 24 hours prior to application.


A. Weather




1.Proceed with roofing only when existing and forecasted

weather conditions permit.

2.Ambient temperatures must be above 45°F (7.2°C) when

applying hot asphalt or water based adhesives.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Provide Manufacturers standard Guarantee with single source coverage and no monetary limitation where the manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components in the roofing

system, which cause a leak due to a failure in materials or

workmanship.

1.Duration: Thirty (30) years from the date of completion.

*Materials and workmanship of listed products within this

section when installed in accordance with current.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. GAF® - 1 Campus Drive, Parsippany, NJ 07054. B. CARLISLE – 16430 N. SCOTTSDALE ROAD #400 SCOTTSSDALE, AZ.

85254

C. TROPICAL ROOFING PRODUCTS-1818 SW 31ST AVE HALLANDALE,FL 3309

2.02 INSULATION

A. Rigid polyisocyanurate board, with a strong white or black

fibrous glass facer conforming to or exceeding the

requirements of STM C 1289 / FS HH-I-1972 Polyiso

Insulation, with the following characteristics:

1. Board Thickness: 2.6”

2. Thermal Resistance (LTTR value) of: 15.0

B. Rigid polyisocyanurate board, with a strong white or black

fibrous glass facer conforming to or exceeding the

requirements of ASTM C 1289 / FS HH-I-1972. Tapered Polyiso

Insulation, with the following characteristics:

1. Board Thickness: ¼” tapered.

2. Thermal Resistance (LTTR value) of: varies.

C. Rigid polyisocyanurate cover board, with a coated polymer-

bonded glass fiber mat facers on both major surfaces of the

core foam conforming to or exceeding the requirements of

ASTM C 1289 / Class 4, Grade 1. HD Polyiso Insulation, with

the following characteristics:




1. Board Thickness: ½” or 12.7mm

2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 80psi (551kPa)

3. Thermal Resistance (LTTR value) of: >2.5

2.03 MEMBRANE MATERIALS

A. A smooth type, polyester scrim reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin membrane with a nominal 0.060 inch (60 mil)

thickness, for use as a single ply roofing membrane.

Engineered to provide high solar reflectivity and extremely

high UV and thermal resistance. These combined

characteristics produce a single-ply membrane suitable for

the most demanding solar installations as well as any other

high heat or solar loading applications. Meets or exceeds

the minimum requirements of ASTM D-6878. UL Listed and FM

Approved. Each full roll contains approximately 1000

sq.ft. of roofing material, 10’ X 100’, weighing 322 lbs.

TPO 60 mil thermoplastic single-ply roofing membrane.

2.04 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. A smooth type, polyester scrim reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin membrane with a nominal 0.060 inch (60 mil)

thickness, for use as a single ply roofing membrane.

Engineered to provide high solar reflectivity and extremely

high UV and thermal resistance. These combined

characteristics produce a single-ply membrane suitable for

the most demanding solar installations as well as any other

high heat or solar loading applications. Meets or exceeds

the minimum requirements of ASTM D-6878. UL Listed and FM

Approved. Each full roll contains approximately 1000

sq.ft. Of roofing material, 10’ X 100’, weighing 322 lbs.

TPO 60 mil thermoplastic single-ply roofing membrane.

2.05 ADHESIVES, SEALANTS and PRIMERS

A. Low VOC solvent-based Bonding Adhesive: Solvent based

rubberized adhesive for use with TPO membranes, Low VOC

Bonding Adhesive.

B. Low VOC solvent based primer for preparing surfaces to receive butyl based adhesive tapes, TPO Low VOC Primer.

C. Low VOC TPO cleaner designed to clean exposed or

contaminated seams prior to heat welding to remove any

residual soap or revitalize aged membranes. Contains only

50 grams per liter of Volatile Organic Content and has been

formulated using a blend of primarily VOC-exempt




ingredients to be in compliance with air quality

regulations for single ply roofing products.

D. One part butyl based high viscosity sealant suitable for sealing between flashing membrane and substrate surface

behind exposed termination bars and for sealing between

roofing membrane and drain flange.

E. 100% solids epoxy based two-part sealant suitable for

filling sealant pans at irregularly-shaped penetrations.

Epoxy is part A. Polyamide is part B.

F. One-part, moisture-cure, self-leveling sealant designed for use in pitch pans on single ply roof systems. One-Part

Pourable Sealant.

G. Insulation Adhesive:

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. FLASHING ACCESSORIES

1. A smooth type, unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin

based membrane for use as an alternative

flashing/reinforcing material for penetrations and corners.

Required whenever preformed vent boots cannot be used,

0.055 inches (55 mils) nominal thickness and sheet size:

24in x 50ft.

2. An 8 inch (20 cm) wide smooth type, polyester scrim

reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin membrane strip for use

as a cover strip over coated metal and stripping-in coated

metal flanges and general repairs: 0.045 inches (45 mils)

nominal thickness with 100 foot length.

3. Extruded aluminum termination bar with angled lip caulk

receiver and lower leg bulb stiffener. Pre-punched slotted

holes at 6” on center or 8” on center. ¾” x 10’ with 0.090”

cross section.

4. A 6 inch (14 cm) wide, smooth type, heat-weldable

polyester scrim reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin

membrane strip. Designed for use as a cover strip over

non-coated metal edges and flanges. Each full roll

contains approximately 100 Lineal Ft. of material, 6” X

100’.




5. .045” reinforced TPO membrane with pressure sensitive adhesive, to be installed on horizontal surfaces using

plates and fasteners as a base attachment in fully

adhered systems. Size 6” x 100’.

6. 24 gauge steel with 0.025” thick TPO based film as required for fabrication into metal gravel stop and drip

edge profiles, metal base and curb flashings, sealant

pans, and scupper sleeves. Standard sheet size 4’ x 10’,

sheet weight 47 lbs. Custom sizes available.

B. WALL & CURB ACCESSORIES

1. 55 mil TPO membrane and 24 gauge coated metal

prefabricated into standard and custom size thru wall

scuppers. Available in two sizes: 4" x 6" x 12" (l x w x

d) with a 5.75" x 3.75" opening and 8" x 10" x 12" (l x w

x d) with a 9.75" x 7.75" opening.

2. .045” thick reinforced TPO membrane fabricated corners. Available in four standard sizes to flash curbs. Four

corners are required to flash the curb.

3. 0.045” thick molded TPO membrane outside corners of base and curb flashing. Hot-air welds directly to TPO

membrane. Size 4” x 4” with 6” flange.

4. 0.055” molded TPO membrane inside corners of base and

curb flashing. Hot-air welds directly to TPO membrane.

Size 6” x 6” x 5.5”.

5. 8” diameter, nominal .050” vacuum formed unreinforced TPO membrane for use in flashing outside corners of base

and curb flashings.

6. 0.050” molded TPO membrane inside corners of base and curb flashing. Hot-air welds directly to TPO membrane.

Size 6” x 6” x 5.25” high.

C. PENETRATION ACCESSORIES

1. 0.065” thick molded TPO membrane sized to accommodate most common pipe and conduits, (1” to 6” diameter pipes),

including square tube. Hot-air welded directly to TPO

membrane, supplied with stainless steel clamping rings.




2. 0.045” thick molded TPO membrane preformed boots are split to accommodate most common pipes and conduits and

available in three standard sizes.

3. 0.045” thick molded TPO membrane preformed square boots are split to accommodate most common square penetrations

and conduits and available in three standard sizes.

4. .070 thick molded penetration pocket to provide

structure and foundation for the application of a

pourable sealant for a variety of roof penetrations ,

weldable and 9" x 6" x 4" (l x w x h).

5. .055” thick smooth type, unreinforced thermoplastic

polyolefin membrane designed for use as a conforming

membrane seal over T-joints in 60 and 80 mil membrane

applications.

6. Aluminum drain unit coated with a weldable TPO compound. TPO membrane can be heat welded directly to the drain

body, resulting in a strong, secure installation. Each

drain is fitted with a BlueSeal® mechanical drain seal

for a secure, tight seal into the building drain system.

Available in two sizes ( 3” and 4”), and custom sizes

are available.

D. ROOF EDGE ACCESSORIES

1. Three piece fascia system with continuous galvanized steel spring cant, exterior decorative snap-on fascia and

available in 10 foot lengths in standard or custom

colors.

2. Two piece fascia system with rigid terminator base plate and exterior decorative fascia cover available in 10 foot

lengths in standard or custom colors for use with 45 mil

and 60 mil only.

3. Two piece fascia system with rigid extruded terminator base plate and exterior decorative snap-on fascia cover

available in 10 foot lengths in standard or custom

colors.

E. FIELD OF ROOF ACCESSORIES 1. Pre-manufactured expansion joint covers used to bridge expansion joint openings in a roof structure. Fabricated

to accommodate all roof to wall and roof to roof

applications, made of .060” reinforced TPO membrane,




available in 5 standard sizes for expansion joint

openings up to 8” wide.

2. .055” thick smooth type, unreinforced thermoplastic

polyolefin membrane designed for use as a conforming

membrane seal over T-joints in 60 and 80 mil membrane

applications.

3. 1/8” thick extruded and embossed TPO roll 34” x 50’, heat welds directly to roofing membrane. Unique

herringbone traction surface. Available in gray or

yellow.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that the surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that the deck is supported and secured.

C. Verify that the deck is clean and smooth, free of

depressions, waves, or projections, and properly sloped to

drains, valleys, eaves, scuppers or gutters.

D. Verify that the deck surfaces are dry and free of ice or snow.

E. Verify that all roof openings or penetrations through the roof are solidly set, and that all flashings are tapered.

3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

A. Structural Concrete Deck 1.Minimum deck thickness for structural concrete is 4”

(10.2 cm).

2.Only poured in place concrete decks that provide bottom

side drying are acceptable. Decks that are installed over

non-vented metal decks or pans that remain in place may

trap moisture in the deck beneath the roof system and are

not acceptable.

3.The roof deck shall be properly cured prior to

application of the roofing system; twenty-eight (28) days

is normally required for proper curing. Curing agents

must be checked for compatibility with roofing materials.

Prior to the installation of the roof assemblies,

recommend the evaluation of the surface moisture and




deck’s dryness through the use of ASTM D-4263 or hot

bitumen test.

4.The deck must be smooth, level and cannot be wet or

frozen. If deck is determined to be wet, it must be

allowed to dry.

5.Treat cracks greater than 1/8” (3 mm) in width in

accordance with the deck manufacturer’s recommendations.

6.Sumps for the roof drains shall be provided in the

casting of the deck.

7.When insulation or roofing is to be adhered with hot

asphalt, prime the deck with asphalt/concrete primer,

ASTM D 41 at the rate of one gallon per 100 square feet

(0.4 L/m2). Allow the primer to dry prior to the

application of the roofing system.

8.In all retrofit roof applications, it is required that

deck be inspected for defects. Any defects are to be

corrected per the deck manufacturer’s recommendations

prior to the new roof application.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install TPO roofing system according to all current

application requirements in addition to those listed in

this section.

B. TPO Specification #: TFATI60EX OR EQUAL

C. Start the application of membrane plies at the low point of the roof or at the drains, so that the flow of water is

over or parallel to, but never against the laps.

3.04 INSULATION - GENERAL

A. Do not apply roof insulation or roofing until all other work trades have completed jobs that require them to

traverse the deck on foot or with equipment. A vapor

retarder coated lightly with asphalt may be applied to

protect the inside of the structure prior to the insulation

and final roofing installation. Before the application of

the insulation, any damage or deterioration to the vapor

retarder must be repaired.

B. Do not install wet, damaged or warped insulation boards.

C. Install insulation boards with staggered board joints in one direction (unless taping joint).




D. Install insulation boards snug. Gaps between board joints must not exceed ¼” (6 mm). All gaps in excess of ¼” (6 mm)

must be filled with like insulation material.

E. Wood nailers must be 3-1/2” (8.9 cm) minimum width or 1” (25 mm) wider than metal flange. They shall be of equal

thickness as the insulation, and be treated for rot

resistance. All nailers must be securely fastened to the

deck.

F. Do not kick insulation boards into place.

G. Miter and fill the edges of the insulation boards at

ridges, valleys and other changes in plane to prevent open

joints or irregular surfaces. Avoid breaking or crushing of

the insulation at the corners.

H. Insulation should not be installed over new lightweight insulating concrete.

I. Roof tape, if required over insulation joints, must be laid evenly, smoothly and embedded in a uniform coating of hot

steep asphalt with 4” (10.2 cm) end laps. Care must be

taken to assure smooth application of tape, and full

embedment of the tape in the asphalt.

J. Do not install any more insulation than will be completely waterproofed each day.

3.05 INSULATION – BASE LAYER

A. The substrate must be free of and debris, dust, dirt, oil, grease, and standing water before applying the adhesive.

B. must be applied using the specially designed PaceCart

dispenser. Bond shall be applied using one of the

specially designed dual cartridge dispensers.

C. Install insulation layers applied with bands of Bond 500 spaced 12” O.C. – Field, 6” O.C. – Perimeter and 4” O.C. –

Corners. Approximate coverage rate is ½ to 1 gallon per

100 square feet, depending on the substrate. Allow the

foam to rise ¾” to 1”. Walk each board firmly into place.

Stagger the joints of additional layers in relation to the

insulation joints in the layer(s) below by a minimum of 6”

(15.2 cm) to eliminate continuous vertical gaps.

3.06 INSULATION – SUBSEQUENT LAYERS




A. The substrate must be free of and debris, dust, dirt, oil,

grease, and standing water before applying the adhesive.

B. Bond must be applied using the specially designed PaceCart

dispenser. Bond shall be applied using one of the

specially designed dual cartridge dispensers.

C. Install insulation layers applied with bands of Bond spaced

12” O.C. – Field, 6” O.C. – Perimeter and 4” O.C. –

Corners. Approximate coverage rate is ½ to 1 gallon per 100

square feet, depending on the substrate. Allow the foam to

rise ¾” to 1”. Walk each board firmly into place. Stagger

the joints of additional layers in relation to the

insulation joints in the layer(s) below by a minimum of 6”

(15.2 cm) to eliminate continuous vertical gaps.

3.07 MEMBRANE APPLICATION

A. Fully Adhered:

1. Place membrane so that wrinkles and buckles are not formed. Any wrinkles or buckles must be removed from the

sheet prior to permanent attachment. Roof membrane shall

be fully adhered immediately after it is rolled out,

followed by welding to adjacent sheets.

2. Overlap roof membrane a minimum of 3” (15 cm) for side laps and 3” (15 cm) for end laps.

3. Install membrane so that the side laps run across the roof slope lapped towards drainage points.

4. All exposed sheet corners shall be rounded a minimum of 1”.

5. Use full width rolls in the field and perimeter region of roof.

6. Use appropriate bonding adhesive for substrate surface, applied with a solvent-resistant roller, brush or

squeegee.

7. Apply bonding adhesive at 6 squares of finished, mated surface area per 5 gallons (Low VOC). A greater quantity

of bonding adhesive may be required based upon the

substrate surface condition.

8. Prevent seam contamination by keeping the adhesive

application a few inches back from the seam area.

9. Adhere approximately one half of the membrane sheet at a time. One half of the sheet’s length shall be folded

back in turn to allow for adhesive application. Lay

membrane into adhesive once the bonding adhesive is

tacky to the touch.




10. Roll membrane with a weighted roller to ensure complete bonding between adhesive and membrane.

11. Membrane laps shall be heat-welded together. All welds shall be continuous, without voids or partial welds.

Welds shall be free of burns and scorch marks.

12. Weld shall be a minimum of 1-1/2” in width for

automatic machine welding and a minimum 2” in width for

hand welding.

13. All cut edges of reinforced membrane must be sealed with TPO Cut Edge Sealant.

14. Supplemental membrane attachment is required at the base of all walls and curbs, and where the angle of the

substrate changes by more than five (5) degrees (1” in

12”). Roofing membrane shall be secured to the

structural deck with appropriate screws and plates

spaced every 12” o.c. The screws and plates must be

installed no less than ½” from the membrane edge.

Alternatively, the roofing membrane may be turned up the

vertical plane a minimum of 3” and secured with screws

and termination bar Fastener spacing is the same as is

used for in-lap attachment. The termination bar must be

installed within 1-1/2” to 2” of the plane of the roof

membrane, with a minimum of 1” of membrane extending

above the termination bar.

15. Supplemental membrane attachment to the structural deck is required at all penetrations unless the insulation

substrate is fully adhered to the deck. Roofing membrane

shall be secured to the deck with appropriate screws and

plates.

16. Fasteners must be installed to achieve the proper

embedment depth. Install fasteners without lean or tilt.

17. Install fasteners so that the plate or termination bar is drawn down tightly to the membrane surface. Properly

installed fasteners will not allow the plate or

termination bar to move (underdriving), but will not

cause wrinkling of the membrane (overdriving).

3.08 FLASHINGS

A. General: 1. All penetrations must be at least 24” (61 cm) from

curbs, walls, and edges to provide adequate space for

proper flashing.

2. Flash all perimeter, curb, and penetration conditions

with coated metal, membrane flashing, and flashing

accessories as appropriate to the site condition.




3. All coated metal and membrane flashing corners shall be

reinforced with preformed corners or non-reinforced

membrane.

4. Hot-air weld all flashing membranes, accessories, and

coated metal. A minimum 2” wide (hand welder) weld or

minimum 1 - 1/2" automatic machine weld is required.

5. All cut edges of reinforced membrane must be sealed with

TPO Cut Edge Sealant.

6. Consult the Application and Specifications Manual or

Contractor Services for more information on specific

construction details, or those not addressed in this

section.

B. Coated Metal Flashings: 1. Coated metal flashings shall be formed in accordance

with current construction details and SMACNA guidelines.

2. Coated metal sections used for roof edging, base

flashing and coping shall be butted together with a ¼”

gap to allow for expansion and contraction. Hot-air weld

a 6” wide reinforced membrane flashing strip to both

sides of the joint, with approximately 1” on either side

of the joint left un-welded to allow for expansion and

contraction. 2” wide aluminum tape can be installed over

the joint as a bond-breaker, to prevent welding in this

area.

3. Coated metal used for sealant pans, scupper inserts, corners of roof edging, base flashing and coping shall

be overlapped or provided with separate metal pieces to

create a continuous flange condition, and pop-riveted

securely. Hot-air weld a 6” wide reinforced membrane

flashing strip over all seams that will not be sealed

during subsequent flashing installation.

4. Provide a ½” hem for all exposed metal edges to provide corrosion protection and edge reinforcement for improved

durability.

5. Provide a ½” hem for all metal flange edges whenever possible to prevent wearing of the roofing and flashing

membranes at the flange edge.

6. Coated metal flashings shall be nailed to treated wood nailers or otherwise mechanically attached to the roof

deck, wall or curb substrates, in accordance with

construction detail requirements.

C. Reinforced Membrane Flashings: 1. The thickness of the flashing membrane shall be the same

as the thickness of the roofing membrane.




2. Membrane flashing may either be installed loose or fully adhered to the substrate surface in accordance with

“Construction Detail Requirements”.

3. Where flashings are to be fully adhered, apply bonding adhesive at a rate resulting in 60 square feet/gallon of

finished roofing material for solvent-based bonding

adhesives, and at a rate of 125 square feet/gallon of

finished roofing material for water-borne bonding

adhesive. Apply bonding adhesive to both the underside

of the membrane and the substrate surface at 120 square

feet per gallon (Solvent Based) and 250 square feet per

gallon (Water Based). A greater quantity of bonding

adhesive may be required based upon the substrate

surface condition. The bonding adhesive must be allowed

to dry until tacky to the touch before flashing membrane

application.

4. Apply the adhesive only when outside temperature is above 40°F. Recommended minimum application temperature

is 50°F to allow for easier adhesive application.

5. The membrane flashing shall be carefully positioned

prior to application to avoid wrinkles and buckles.

D. Un-reinforced Membrane Flashings: 1. Un-reinforced membrane is used to field-fabricate

penetration or reinforcement flashings in locations

where preformed corners and pipe boots cannot be

properly installed.

2. Penetration flashings constructed of un-reinforced

membrane are typically installed in two sections, a

horizontal piece that extends onto the roofing membrane

and a vertical piece that extends up the penetration.

The two pieces are overlapped and hot-air welded

together.

3. The un-reinforced membrane flashing shall be adhered to the penetration surface. Apply bonding adhesive at a

rate resulting in 60 square feet/gallon of finished

roofing material for solvent-based bonding adhesives,

and at a rate of 125 square feet/gallon of finished

roofing material for water-borne bonding adhesive. Apply

bonding adhesive to both the underside of the membrane

and the substrate surface at 120 square feet per gallon

(Solvent Based) and 250 square feet per gallon (Water

Based). A greater quantity of bonding adhesive may be

required based upon the substrate surface condition.

The bonding adhesive must be allowed to dry until tacky

to the touch before flashing membrane application.

E. Roof Edges:




1. Roof edge flashings are applicable for gravel stop and drip edge conditions as well as for exterior edges of

parapet walls.

2. Flash roof edges with metal flanges nailed 4” O.C. to pressure-treated wood nailers. Where required, hot-air

weld roof membrane to coated metal flanges.

3. When the fascia width exceeds 4”, coated metal roof edging must be attached with a continuous cleat to

secure the lower fascia edge. The cleat must be secured

to the building no less than 12” O.C.

4. Alternatively, roof edges may be flashed with a 2-piece snap on fascia system, adhering the roof membrane to a

metal cant and face nailing the membrane 8” on center

prior to installing a snap-on fascia.

5. Flash roof edge scuppers with a coated metal insert that is mechanically attached to the roof edge and integrated

as a part of the metal edging.

F. Parapet and Building Walls: 1. Flash walls with TPO membrane adhered to the substrate

with bonding adhesive, loose applied (Less than 24” in

height) or with coated metal flashing nailed 4” on

center to pressure-treated wood nailers.

2. Secure membrane flashing at the top edge with a

termination bar. Water Block shall be applied between

the wall surface and membrane flashing underneath all

exposed termination bars. Exposed termination bars shall

be mechanically fastened 8” on center; termination bars

that are counter flashed shall be fastened 12” on

center.

3. Roof membrane must be mechanically attached along the base of walls with screws and plates (deck securement)

or screws and inverted termination bar (wall securement)

at the following rate:

Fully / Self Adhered

Systems

12” on center

4. All coated metal wall flashings and loose applied

membrane flashings must be provided with separate metal

counterflashings, or metal copings.

5. Metal counterflashings may be optional with fully

adhered flashings depending on guarantee requirements.

Exposed termination bars must be sealed with roofing

cement or caulk grade.




6. Flash wall scuppers with a coated metal insert that is mechanically attached to the wall and integrated as part

of the wall flashing.

G. Curbs and Ducts: 1. Flash curbs and ducts with TPO membrane adhered to the

curb substrate with bonding adhesive, loose applied

(Less than 18” in height) or with coated metal flashing

nailed 4” on center to pressure-treated wood nailers.

2. Secure membrane flashing at the top edge with a

termination bar. Water Block shall be applied between

the curb/duct surface and membrane flashing underneath

all termination bars. Exposed termination bars shall be

mechanically fastened every 8”o.c.; termination bars

that are counter flashed shall be fastened 12” on

center.

3. Roof membrane must be mechanically attached along the base of walls with screws and plates (deck securement)

or screws and inverted termination bar (wall securement)

at the following rate:

Fully / Self Adhered

Systems

12” on center

4. All coated metal curb flashings and loose applied

membrane flashings must be provided with separate metal

counterflashings, or metal copings.

5. Metal counterflashings may be optional with fully

adhered flashings depending on guarantee requirements.

Exposed termination bars must be sealed with roofing

cement or caulk grade.

H. Roof Drains: 1. Roof drains must be fitted with compression type

clamping rings and strainer baskets. Original-type cast

iron and aluminum drains, as well as retrofit-type cast

iron, aluminum or molded plastic drains are acceptable.

2. Roof drains must be provided with a minimum 36” x 36” sump. Slope of tapered insulation within the sump shall

not exceed 4” in 12”.

3. Extend the roofing membrane over the drain opening. Locate the drain and cut a hole in the roofing membrane

directly over the drain opening. Provide a ½” of

membrane flap extending past the drain flange into the

drain opening. Punch holes through the roofing membrane

at drain bolt locations.

4. For cast iron and aluminum drains, the roofing membrane must be set in a full bed of water block on the drain




flange prior to securement with the compression clamping

ring. Typical water block application is one 10.5 ounce

cartridge per drain.

5. Lap seams shall not be located within the sump area. Where lap seams will be located within the sump area, a

separate roof membrane drain flashing a minimum of 12”

larger than the sump area must be installed. The roof

membrane shall be mechanically attached 12” on center

around the drain with screws and plates. The separate

roof drain flashing shall be heat welded to the roof

membrane beyond the screws and plates, extended over the

drain flange, and secured as above.

6. Tighten the drain compression ring in place.

3.09 TRAFFIC PROTECTION

A. Install walkway rolls at all roof access locations and other designated locations including roof-mounted equipment

work locations and areas of repeated rooftop traffic.

B. Walkway pads must be spaced 2" apart to allow for drainage between the pads.

C. Heat-weld walkway rolls to the roof membrane surface

continuously around the perimeter of the roll.

D. Walkway rolls may be installed with TPO primer and 3” seam tape.

1. Roll or brush the TPO primer on the back of the TPO pad along the edges and down the middle length of the pad.

2. Clean and prime the roof membrane where the pad will be installed.

3. Install tape to the back of the cleaned area of the pad and roll in with a silicone hand roller.

4. Remove release paper and install the tapes pads directly onto the roof membrane. Roll pads to secure in place

3.10 ROOF PROTECTION

A. Protect all partially and fully completed roofing work from other trades until completion.

B. Whenever possible, stage materials in such a manner that foot traffic is minimized over completed roof areas.

C. When it is not possible to stage materials away from

locations where partial or complete installation has taken

place, temporary walkways and platforms shall be installed




in order to protect all completed roof areas from traffic

and point loading during the application process.

D. Temporary tie-ins shall be installed at the end of each workday and removed prior to commencement of work the

following day.

3.11 CLEAN-UP

A. All work areas are to be kept clean, clear and free of debris at all times.

B. Do not allow trash, waste, or debris to collect on the roof. These items shall be removed from the roof on a

daily basis.

C. All tools and unused materials must be collected at the end of each workday and stored properly off of the finished

roof surface and protected from exposure to the elements.

D. Dispose of or recycle all trash and excess material in a manner conforming to current EPA regulations and local

laws.

E. Properly clean the finished roof surface after completion, and make sure the drains and gutters are not clogged.

F. Clean and restore all damaged surfaces to their original condition.

END OF SECTION

ROOFING SYSTEM CONTRACTOR PACKAGE

2006-2016 FM Approvals LLC. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 6

* FM Approved roofs must also have corner and perimeter enhancements and FM Approved perimeter flashing. For details, see FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-29 and 1-49. For Standing/Lap Seam roofs, see Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-31.

CONTACT INFORMATION

Slope: Wind Borne Debris Risk:

Hail: Corner:

Height: Wind Speed: Exterior Fire: Perimeter:

Dimensions: Surface Roughness:

Internal Fire: Field:

Roof Area Properties Site Properties Fire / Hail Wind Uplift Ratings

ROOF AREA CLASSIFICATIONS

Type of Work: New Roof Min 3ft (1 m) Continuous Parapet:

Created In RoofNav: Jul 05, 2017 Assembly #: 334717-0-0

Roof Area: Index Number (Optional):

Building Name/Number: Area of Roof: Field

OVERVIEW OF WORK

No

For Use With Non-Combustible Walls:

NC/A 0.7500 in 12 (3.6°) SH 195 psf

Internal/Exterior Fire: Max Slope: Hail: *Wind Uplift Rating:

RATINGS FOR FM APPROVED ASSEMBLY#:



SIGNATURES

Signature of Installing Contractor:

Title: Date:

Signature of Designer/Observer:

Title: Date:

Signature of Client/Property Owner:

Title: Date:

ASSEMBLY DETAIL COMMENTS



Over Substrate Rate Wet: 0.4550 gal/square

Underside Rate Dry: 0.0000 lb/square

Underside Rate Wet: 0.4550 gal/square

Over Substrate Rate Dry: 0.0000 lb/square

Substrate Primer Rate Dry: 0.0000 lb/square

Type: liquid/semi-solid

Material: solvent-based

Substrate Primer Rate Wet: 0.0000 gal/square

Trade Name: EverGuard Low VOC TPO Bonding Adhesive

Company: GAF

Adhesive (Full Application)

Comments: Applied at a total rate of .91 gal/sq (0.37 l/m2). One half of the adhesive is applied to the back of the roof cover and one half of the adhesive is applied to the substrate.

2. Securement (Cover) from 1. Cover (Single-ply) to 3. Cover Board

Comments: none

Securement (Sheet Lap)

Comments: none

Outside/Full Width: 1.5000 in

Inside Width: 0.0000 in

Configuration: Single

Trade Name: weld, hot air

Company: Generic

Weld (Heat)

Comments: 3 in. (76 mm) lap sealed with minimum 1.5 in. (38 mm) wide heat weld.

1. Cover (Single-ply)

Comments: none

Min Thickness: 0.0600 in

Reinforcement: polyester

Max Thickness: 0.0800 in

Backing: (none)

Material: TPO (thermoplastic olefin)

Max Width: 0.0000 in

Trade Name: Everguard Extreme TPO

Company: GAF

Cover (Single-ply)

Comments: none



Board Profile: flat

Min Density: 0.0000 lb/ft3



Min Board Size: 48.00 x 96.00 in

Material: polyisocyanurate/polyurethane

Trade Name: EnergyGuard POLYISO INSULATION

Company: GAF

Insulation (Board Stock)

Comments: none

5. Insulation (Board Stock)

Comments: none

Type: foam

Application Method: Linear

Tape Width: 0.0000 in

Ribbon Width: 0.7500 in

Row Spacing: 12.0000 in

Material: polyurethane

Trade Name: OlyBond 500 Adhesive Fastener

Company: OMG

Adhesive (Ribbons)

Comments: Maximum ribbon width 1.0" (25 mm) wide

4. Securement (Board Stock) from 3. Cover Board to 5. Insulation (Board Stock)

Comments: none

Board Profile: flat

Min Density: 0.0000 lb/ft3



Min Board Size: 48.00 x 48.00 in

Material: polyisocyanurate/polyurethane

Trade Name: EnergyGuard HD Polyiso Insulation

Company: GAF

Cover Board

Comments: none

3. Cover Board

Comments: none



Type: foam

Application Method: Linear

Tape Width: 0.0000 in

Ribbon Width: 0.7500 in

Row Spacing: 12.0000 in

Material: polyurethane

Trade Name: OlyBond 500 Adhesive Fastener

Company: OMG

Adhesive (Ribbons)

Comments: Maximum ribbon width 1.0" (25 mm) wide

6. Securement (Board Stock) from 5. Insulation (Board Stock) to 7. (Deck) Structural Concrete

Comments: none

Min Strength: 0.0000 ksi


Max Spacing: 0.0000 in

Structure Type: concrete

8. Structure

Comments: none

Note: Structural Concrete deck must have a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.24 Mpa) and a minimum thickness of 2 inches (50 mm).

7. (Deck) Structural Concrete

Comments: none



Fastener Placement

Now that the configuration is complete for the field of the roof, you must select the required fastener placement from the Fastener Placement Figures 3–6 in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.

Corner/Perimeter Enhancements

Now that you have selected a fastener placement, you must select enhancements for the corners and perimeters. Refer to FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.

If you have sufficient detail about the roof assembly, you can select enhancements that have been approved for roofs with your specifications from Table 1A: Recommended Rating of Field, Perimeter and Corner Areas (Zones 1, 2 and 3) for Enclosed Buildings.

Also, the deck must be secured per the requirements in Data Sheet 1-29. For a steel deck, see section 2.2.1.5.6. For installation instructions, see section 2.2.13.2.

Otherwise, you can select the appropriate prescriptive enhancements from section 2.2.1.5.1.

Perimeter Flashing

Now that you have selected enhancements for the corners and perimeters, you must select an FM Approved perimeter flashing that meets a Class X rating, where X is the Wind Uplift rating for your roof. For more information, see FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.

You can find FM Approved perimeter flashings in RoofNav. To do so, click Products. On the Product Search page, select Other for the Category and Perimeter Flashing for the Subcategory. Specify any other criteria as needed and then click Search.

CHECKLIST FOR ROOFING SYSTEM

X2688 ENGINEERING (Rev. Sept 2014)

CONTACT INFORMATION: INDEX NUMBER:

ROOFING CONTRACTOR (NAME & ADDRESS)

TELEPHONE NO.:

FAX:

E-MAIL ADDRESS:

CONTACT:

CLIENT (NAME & ADDRESS)

TELEPHONE NO.:

FAX:

E-MAIL ADDRESS:

CONTACT:

OVERVIEW OF WORK: (Submit 1 form per roof area)

Building Name & Number:

Building Dimensions: Length: ft/m; Width: ft/m.; Height ft/m.

Roof Slope:

Parapet Height ,max (in./m): Parapet Height ,min (in /m): Type of Work: New Construction Recover (New roof over existing Roofing System) Reroof (New cover/remove existing roofing system to deck) Other

FM Approved RoofNav Assembly Numbers:

ROOF SURFACING:

None

Coating (Trade Name/Application Rate)

Granules (Application Rate)

Gravel/Slag (Application Rate)

Ballast: Stone Size Pavers (Beveled or square edge); Other:

Ballast Weight (psf): Field: Perimeter: Corners:

ROOF COVER/MEMBRANE: (Please provide ALL applicable details including trade name, type, number of plies, thickness, reinforced, adhesive)

Panel: Through Fastened Metal

Standing Seam metal

Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP)

Other:

Single Ply: Adhered Fastened Ballasted

Built Up Roofing (BUR)

Modified Bitumen Lap Width in/mm Lap Adhesion Type

Spray Applied

Other:

BASE SHEET: (Please include Trade Name, Type, and Width)

None

Trade Name: Width: 36 In. 1 meter (39 In.)

Fastened Adhered

Secured per RoofNav OR Per FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29

Comments:

Lap Width in/mm Lap Adhesion Type

Air Retarder Vapor Retarder

INSULATION

Layer Trade Name Thickness (In.)

Fastened Adhered Tapered

1. Top

2. Next

3. Next

4. Next

Glass Fiber/Mineral Wool/Batt Facer Type/Vapor Barrier

Thermal Barrier



Other:

None

DECK: (Please include manufacturer, type, yield strength, thickness/gage, etc.)

Steel:

LWIC (Form Deck): Cementitious Wood Fiber:

Concrete: Pre-cast panels or Cast in Place

Wood

Fiber Reinforced Cement Fiber Reinforced Plastic

Gypsum: Plank Poured

Other:

Comments:

ROOF STRUCTURE (Include Size, Gage, Etc.):

Purlins “C” OR “Z”

Joists Wood OR Steel

Beams Wood OR Steel

Other:

Spacing: Field: Perimeter: Corners:

Comments:

FASTENERS USED IN ROOF ASSEMBLY:

Roof Cover Fasteners: Trade Name: Length: Diameter:

Stress Plate/Batten:

Spacing: Field: X Perimeter: X Corners: X

Insulation Fasteners: Trade Name: Type:

Size: Stress Plate:

Spacing: Field: Perimeter: Corners:

Deck Or Roof Panels Fasteners:

Trade Name:

Type:

Length: Size Washer:

If Weld: Size: Weld: Washer:

Deck Side Lap Fasteners: Field: X Perimeter: X Corners: X

Spacing: Field: X Perimeter: X Corners: X

Base Sheet Fasteners

Trade Name:

Type:

Head Diameter: Length:

Spacing: (Attached Sketches as necessary)

Spacing Along Laps: Field:

Perimeter:

Corners:

No. Intermediate Rows: Field: Perimeter: Corners:

Spacing Along Intermediate Rows: Field: Perimeter: Corners:

PERIMETER FLASHING: (Attach a detailed sketch of metal fascia, gravel stop, nailer, coping, etc.)

FM Approved Flashing Per FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49

Other: Comments:

DRAINAGE:

For new construction: Has roof drainage been designed by a Qualified Engineer per FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-54 and the local building code? Yes No (Attach details)

For re-roofing and recovering: will the roof drainage be changed from the original design (for example: drain inserts, drains covered or removed, new expansion joints, blocked or reduced scupper size? Yes No If yes, were the changes reviewed by a Qualified Engineer? Yes No (Attach details)

Is secondary (emergency) roof drainage provided per FM Global Data Sheet 1-54? Yes No (Attach details)



FM Global OFFICE REVIEW (Please leave blank for FM Global Office Review) WIND:

Design Wind Speed: (mph) Ground Terrain: B C D

Uplift Pressure in field: (psf) Uplift Rating Required:

Adequate Uplift Rating Provided: Adequate? Yes No

FIRE:

Internal Assembly Rating: Class 1 Class 2 Non-Combustible

External Fire Rating: Class A Class B Class C None

Concealed Spaces? Yes No Sprinklers below Roof? Yes No

Adequate? Yes No

HAIL:

Hail Rating Needed? SH MH None Hail Rating Provided? SH MH None

Adequate? Yes No

COLLAPSE:

If standing seam, has collapse been reviewed? Yes No

COMMENTS:



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.



B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment

details.

2. Include identification of finish for each item.

3. Include pattern of seams and details of termination

points, expansion joints and expansion-joint covers,

direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and

connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and

texture specified.


A. Product certificates.

B. Product test reports.

C. Sample warranty.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who

custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to




that required for this Project and whose products have a

record of successful in-service performance.

1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1

tested, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate

required details as tested and approved.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to

repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim

that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied

finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of

Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall

withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally

induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure

due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation,

or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal

flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and

shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements

for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent

requirements are indicated.

C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings

tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the

following design pressure:

1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from

ambient and surface temperature changes.




2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed

surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary

protective film before shipping.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead

soft, fully annealed; 2B (bright, cold rolled) finish.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-

saturated organic felt; nonperforated.

B. Synthetic Underlayment: Laminated or reinforced, woven

polyethylene or polypropylene, synthetic roofing

underlayment; bitumen free; slip resistant; suitable for

high temperatures over 220 deg F; and complying with

physical requirements of ASTM D 226/D 226M for Type I and

Type II felts.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,

available products that may be incorporated into the

Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation; Summit.

b. Engineered Coated Products; Nova-Seal II.

c. SDP Advanced Polymer Products Inc; Palisade.

C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq.

ft.minimum.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder,

protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous

items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and

trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of

primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-

tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other

suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and

recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or

manufactured item.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=7020&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456837483&mf=04&src=wd






1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws,

gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet

metal using plastic caps or factory-applied

coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing

washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing

on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or

stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being

fastened.

2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300

stainless steel.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone

polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use

classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal

flashing and trim and remain watertight.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to

comply with details shown and recommendations in cited

sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions,

geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of

item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in

shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop

fabrication.

2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates

without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with

exposed edges folded back to form hems.

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where

possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces

exposed to view.

B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of

exposed flashing and trim.

1. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on

Drawings.

C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints

are required, form metal to provide for proper




installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited

sheet metal standard.

D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as

recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application,

but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams.

Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless

otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended

use.

2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not

exceeding 12-foot- long, sections. Fabricate joint plates

of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous

cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg.

Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. Shop fabricate

interior and exterior corners.

1. Fabricate from the Following Materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.

B. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior

corners. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

C. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following

materials:


D. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following

materials:


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment,

wrinkle free, according to manufacturers' written




instructions, and using adhesive where possible to

minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other

components of the Work securely in place, with provisions

for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,

solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and

other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet

metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line,

levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with

minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit

substrates and to result in watertight performance.

Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered

before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach

each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over

fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with

limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool

marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not

permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each

other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or

other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic

action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with

bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as

recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet

metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of stainless-steel sheet metal

flashing and trim with bituminous coating where

flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or

cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing

and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates,

install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of

exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at




maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of

corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,

not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant

concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on

Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not

less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve

maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible

in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of

leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required

for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with

requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Coordinate with drawings.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply

with performance requirements and cited sheet metal

standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and

set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work

with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently

watertight and weather resistant.

B. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces

according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard


C. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of

roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and

other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric

sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.




3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere

with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess

solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films

as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless

otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation

instructions.




JOINT SEALERS 079200-1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.

3. Latex joint sealants.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and

designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.



B. Sample warranties.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or

replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance

and other requirements specified in this Section within

specified warranty period.




1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial

Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to

furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint

sealants that do not comply with performance and other

requirements specified in this Section within specified

warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial

Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect

from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50

percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-

use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.


available products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 791.

b. GE Construction Sealants; SCS2000 SilPruf.

c. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika

Corporation U.S.; Bondaflex Sil 265 LTS.

d. Pecora Corporation; PCS.

e. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil WS-295 FPS.

B. Silicone, S, NS, 25, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25

percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic-

and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT.




a. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika

Corporation U.S.; Bondaflex Sil 199 PG.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456930380&mf=&src=wd












b. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil-N Plus US.

2.3 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged

exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and

mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT:

Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent

and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use,

acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.




a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786-M White.

b. GE Construction Sealants; SCS1700 Sanitary.

c. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika

Corporation U.S.; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF.

d. Soudal USA; RTV GP.

e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex,

ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.




a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems;

Sonolac.

b. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika

Corporation U.S.; Bondaflex 600.

c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20.

d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-

cell material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding

types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer

for joint application indicated, and of size and density to


















control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing

optimum sealant performance.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

available manufacturers offering products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited

to, the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems.

b. Construction Foam Products, a division of Nomaco,

Inc.

c. “Or Approved Equal”

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape

recommended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer

where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates

indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-

substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable

to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible

with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately

before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant

manufacturer's written instructions and the following

requirements:

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical

cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with

adhesion.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by

joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction

joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.







C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent

contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1193 and joint-sealant

manufacturer's written installation instructions for products

and applications indicated, unless more stringent

requirements apply.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support

sealants during application and at position required to

produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed

sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant

movement capability.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant

backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the

following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet

joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths

relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant

movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant

application and before skinning or curing begins, tool

sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration

indicated. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by

sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or

adjacent surfaces.

1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in

ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical

surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete

units.

b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.




c. Joints in dimension stone cladding.

d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicon sealant (Plus 50 percent or minus

50 percent movement).

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal

traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone sealant (Plus 25 percent or

minus 25 percent movement).



C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical

surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Tile control and expansion joints.

b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and

metal interior framing assemblies

c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.



D. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints

in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,

floors, and counters.

b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.

c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing,

S, NS, 25, NT.



E. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.




1. Joint Locations:

a. Aluminum thresholds.

b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based.






HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without

coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.



B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details,

frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for

hardware, and other details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-

applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish

required.

E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, using same reference numbers for details and

openings as those on Drawings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

available manufacturers offering products that may be





incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited

to, the following:

1. Amweld International, LLC.

2. Apex Industries, Inc.

3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.

4. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc.

5. Concept Frames, Inc.

6. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.

7. Custom Metal Products.

8. Daybar.

9. Deansteel.

10. de La Fontaine Industries. 11. DKS Steel Door & Frame Sys. Inc. 12. Door Components, Inc. 13. Fleming-Baron Door Products. 14. Gensteel Doors Inc. 15. Greensteel Industries, Ltd. 16. HMF Express. 17. Hollow Metal Inc. 18. Hollow Metal Xpress. 19. J/R Metal Frames Manufacturing, Inc. 20. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 21. L.I.F. Industries, Inc. 22. LaForce, Inc. 23. Megamet Industries, Inc. 24. Mesker Door Inc. 25. Michbi Doors Inc. 26. MPI Group, LLC (The). 27. National Custom Hollow Metal. 28. North American Door Corp. 29. Philipp Manufacturing Co (The). 30. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 31. Premier Products, Inc. 32. Republic Doors and Frames. 33. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc. 34. Security Metal Products Corp. 35. Shanahans Manufacturing Ltd. 36. Steward Steel; Door Division. 37. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc. 38. Titan Metal Products, Inc. 39. Trillium Steel Doors Limited. 40. West Central Mfg. Inc.












































2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed

and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection

ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure

according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with

NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for

fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing

according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

C. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. At

locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum

thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A40 coating.

d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.

e. Core: Manufacturer's standard insulation

material.

3. Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with

thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 13

when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

4. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum

thickness 14 gauge, with minimum A40 coating.

b. Construction: Knockdown.

5. Exposed Finish: Factory.

2.3 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped

anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch

thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less




than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors

not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to

back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames:

Adjustable compression anchors.

4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or

Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with

expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from

frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded

to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames,

minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two

holes to receive fasteners.

2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type

anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than

2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames

at finish floor surface.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial

Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS),

04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet

complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or

ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized

according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

D. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-

resistant materials.

E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4

inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets

without membrane facing).




G. Glazing: Section 088000 "Glazing."

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic,

compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of

defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to

required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal

thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in

manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project

site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently

factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms

of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal

joints in top edges of doors against water

penetration.

2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of

pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-

performance rating or where indicated.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in

sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide

alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of

same thickness metal as frames.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to

receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts,

reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according

to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated,

mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and

BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for

hardware.

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around

glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of

stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings

welded on secure side of hollow-metal work.




2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable

stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable

of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior

and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-

metal work.

5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable

stops with glazing and installation types indicated.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's

standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.

B. Factory Finish: SDI A250.3.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not

less than 0.016 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size

and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-

HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned,

and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.

After wall construction is complete, remove temporary

braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according

to NFPA 80.

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of

shipping or handling limitations, field splice at

approved locations by welding face joint




continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice

smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on

secure side of opening.

d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.

e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation

only after frames have been properly set and

secured.

f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls

are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with

installation tolerances.

g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames

that will be filled with grout containing

antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and

mullion that extends to floor, and secure with

postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated

fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion

anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop

Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber

insulation inside frames.

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to

allow for solidly filling space between frames and

masonry with grout.

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door

frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to

the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at

door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb

perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at

jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of

wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at

opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines,

and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at

jambs at floor.




B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in

frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as

necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch

plus or minus 1/32 inch.

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4

inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32

inch unless otherwise noted.

d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch

plus or minus 1/32 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances

according to NFPA 80.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in

Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal

manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head

machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches

o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware

items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in

complete and proper operating condition. Remove and

replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that

is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal

work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand

smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply

touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded

areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.




ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Acoustical mineral fiber lay-in panels in exposed

suspension systems.

2. Perimeter and column moldings, trim and accessories for

acoustical ceilings.

3. Adjust existing ceiling grids at new partition work.

4. Replace existing ceiling tiles in existing grid with new

tiles.


1. Metal deck: Division 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS - GENERAL

A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide units

conforming to applicable requirements of ASTM E 1264 for

Class A materials.

B. Surface Finish: Provide all ceiling units with factory-

applied white vinyl latex paint finish.

2.2 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS - GENERAL

A. Provide suspension systems conforming to specified

requirements and to requirements of ASTM C 635.

B. Finish for Exposed Suspension Elements and Accessories:

Manufacturer's standard baked-on enamel.

1. Hot-dip galvanized steel finishes shall meet the

requirements of ASTM C 635 for "Coating Classification

for Severe Environment Performance".

C. Attachment Devices for Suspension System:

1. Anchors and intermediate support members: Provide sizes




capable of sustaining 5 times the load-carrying

capabilities shown in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung"

column.

2. Hanger wire for acoustical ceilings: Zinc-coated

(galvanized) carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper,

with Class 1 coating, minimum 10 gauge (0.135 inch

diameter).

D. Edge Moldings and Trim:

1. Extruded plastic or metal in profiles indicated; where

profiles are not indicated, provide moldings with

profiles suited to edge profiles of ceiling panels and

suspension members.

2. Circular ceiling penetrations: Provide edge moldings

which precisely fit penetrations.

2.3 LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS

A. Ceiling Panels: Provide ceiling panels as manufactured by

Armstrong, USG Interiors Inc., Celotex, or approved equal;

refer to drawings for facial sizes, locations and other

pertinent information including specific products as basis

for project design.

B. Exposed Grid Suspension System: Formed steel with painted

finish; system as manufactured by Armstrong World

Industries, Inc., Chicago Metallic Corp., USG Interiors,

Inc., or approved equal.

1. Profile: Double-web tee, 15/16 inch wide.

2. Structural classification (ASTM C 635): Intermediate

duty system.

3. Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels;

standard smooth texture.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which products of

this section are to be installed and correct any conditions

detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the

work.




B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected to permit proper

installation.




EXTERIOR PAINTING 099100- 1

SECTION 099100 EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed

exterior and interior items and surfaces.

a. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats

specified in this section are in addition to shop

priming and surface treatment specified under other

sections.

2. Paint all exposed surfaces whether or not colors are

designated in "schedules", except where a surface or

material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is

to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not

specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent

materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not

designated, the Architect will select color/finish.

a. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and

covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed steel and

iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and

electrical equipment.

B. Section does not include:

1. Prefinished items.

2. Painting of concealed surfaces, unless specifically

indicated.

3. Prefinished metal surfaces.

4. Moving parts of equipment.

C. Related Sections:

1. Shop priming of ferrous metal: Division 5.

2. Shop finishing (transparent finish) for architectural

woodwork: Division 6.

3. Shop priming of hollow metal work: Division 8.

4. Shop finishing (transparent finish) for wood doors:

Division 8.




1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. DFM (dry film mils): Thickness, measured in mils, of a coat of

paint in the cured state.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for

each coating.

1. Submit material analysis including vehicle type and

percentage by weight and by volume of vehicle, resin, and

pigment.

2. Submit application instructions including mixing, surface

preparation, compatible primers and topcoats, recommended

wet and dry film thickness, recommended application

methods.


A. Single Source Responsibility: All coating materials required

by this section shall be provided by a single manufacturer,

unless otherwise required or approved.

1. For each individual system, provide primer and other

undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as finish

coat.

B. Applicator: Firm with not less than 5 years of successful

experience in painting work similar in scope to work of this

project.

1. Maintain throughout duration of the work a crew of painters

who are fully qualified to satisfy requirements of the

specifications.

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original

containers bearing coating name and color, material composition

data, date of manufacture, legal notices if applicable, and

mixing, thinning, and application instructions.

B. Storage:




1. Store materials in an orderly fashion and in clean, well

closed containers with labels intact.

2. Maintain above 40 degrees F. Do not allow materials to

freeze.


A. Apply coatings only under the following environmental

conditions:

1. Air and surface temperatures are between 50 and 100 degrees

F, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.

2. Surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F above dew

point.

3. Relative humidity is less than 85 percent.

B. Do not apply coatings during inclement weather except within

enclosed, conditioned spaces.

1. Provide temporary lighting to achieve a well lit surface

with a level of at least 80 footcandles measured mid

height.

2. Provide continuous ventilation and heating to prevent

accumulation of hazardous fumes and to maintain surface and

ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours

before, during, and for 48 hours after application of

finishes, or longer if required to obtain fuel cure as

indicated by manufacturer's instructions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. General: Perform work in proper sequence with work of other

trades to avoid damage to finished work.

B. Coordination: Where special coatings will be applied over shop

coatings specified in other sections, coordinate work of such

other sections to ensure that only approved, compatible primers

are applied.

1. Furnish the Architect with product data on both coatings

demonstrating coating compatibility.

1.8 MAINTENANCE STOCK

A. At completion of painting work, deliver stock of maintenance

material to the Owner. Furnish not less than five properly




labeled and sealed one gallon cans of each type of finish coat

of each color, taken from lots furnished for this project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide paints complying with LEED Requirements. Names used in

the Schedules of Coatings for Interior and Exterior Surfaces at

the end of this section are those of Benjamin Moore, as basis

for project design.

1. Provide products of one of the following manufacturers, or

approved equal:

a. Benjamin Moore & Co.

b. PPG Industries, Inc./Pittsburgh Paints.

c. Sherwin Williams Company, Inc.

2.2 PRODUCTS

A. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's premium grade

product complying with compositional requirements and

recommended for anticipated exposures.

B. Colors: For multi-coat systems, apply each coat using a

successively darker tint or shade, unless approved otherwise.

1. Top coat colors: As indicated on drawings and in

schedules; where not indicated or scheduled, provide colors

as selected by the Architect.

C. Lead Content: Not more than 0.06 percent lead by weight

(calculated as lead metal) in the total nonvolatile content of

the paint or the equivalent measure of lead in the dried film.

1. Exception: Where permitted by applicable regulations.

D. VOC Content Limits: The VOC content of all site applied

interior paints and coatings under this section shall not

exceed the following VOC content limits in grams/liter (g/l):

1. Flat paint: 50.

2. Non-flats: 150.

3. Anti-corrosive/anti-rust: 250.

4. Varnishes: 350.




5. Lacquers: 550.

6. Floor coatings: 100.

7. Sealers: Waterproofing - 250; sanding - 275; other - 200.

8. Stains: 250.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready for work in

accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Prior to commencement of work, examine surfaces scheduled to be

finished.

1. Report any unsatisfactory conditions in writing.

2. Do not apply coatings to unsatisfactory substrates.

3. Beginning painting work on an area will be deemed construed

acceptance of surfaces in that area.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Apply coatings to surfaces that are clean and properly prepared

in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as herein

specified. Remove dirt, dust, grease, oils, and foreign

matter. Prepare surface for proper texture necessary to

optimum coating adhesion and intended finished appearance.

Plan cleaning, preparation, and coating operations to avoid

contamination of freshly coated surfaces.

1. Do not apply coatings to labels that identify equipment,

fire resistance ratings, etc.

2. Remove hardware, cover plates, and similar items before

applying coatings.

3. Provide protection for non removable items not scheduled

for coating. After application of coatings, install

removed items. Use only skilled workmen for removal and

replacement of such items.

4. Protect surfaces not scheduled for coating. Clean, repair,

or replace to the satisfaction of the Architect any

surfaces inadvertently spattered or coated.

B. Masonry and Concrete: Apply coatings to fully cured surfaces

that are at least 28 days old.




1. Perform any required surface repairs before applying

coatings. Remove any fins or protrusions from surface.

Patch any holes and cracks in an approved manner. Verify

the joints are struck flush or concave unless otherwise

specifically required.

2. Clean surface of all dirt, oil, wax, grease, or other

contaminants. Use appropriate detergents and hot water.

Thoroughly flush cleaning agents from surface.

C. Ferrous Metal: Clean and prepare surface profile in accordance

with the applicable SSPC specifications for hand tool or power

tool cleaning.

1. Intricate fabricated shapes may be pickled in lieu of hand

or power tool cleaning.

2. Before hand or power tool cleaning, remove visible oil,

grease, soluble welding residue, and salts by solvent

cleaning. After hand or power tool cleaning, reclean

surfaces if necessary.

3. Before touching up coatings damaged by handling or welding,

repair damaged surfaces.

D. Galvanized Metal: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC

specifications.

E. Gypsum Board: Latex-fill minor defects. Spot-prime defects

after repair.

F. Wood: Scrape and remove any sap or pitch deposits from surface

and clean with mineral spirits. Seal any knots and pitch

pockets with a suitable product recommended by the coating

manufacturer. Sand rough spots. Remove dust.

1. After first coat has dried, fill holes, cracks, or

depressions with a suitable wood filler recommended by the

coating manufacturer. Sand filler when dry.

2. Sand surfaces lightly between successive coats. Remove

dust.

G. Mildew: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium

phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface

to dry.

H. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas,

cotton, and other insulated coverings to be painted.




3.3 MIXING AND THINNING

A. Remove and discard any skin formed on surface of coatings in

containers. Discard any containers where skin comprises 2

percent or more of the remaining material. Do not add thinner

except as specifically recommended (not merely permitted) by

the coating manufacturer for proper coating application under

the circumstances prevailing at the project site when

application equipment recommended by the coating manufacturer

is employed. Use only the quantities and the types of thinner

recommended.

B. Mix materials using mechanical mixers in accordance with

coating manufacturer's instructions. Agitate mixed materials

during application if recommended by manufacturer.

C. Combine multi component paints in quantities needed for use

with in the manufacturer's recommended pot life at the

anticipated application temperatures. Discard remaining mixed

material after pot life has expired.

D. Strain pigmented coatings after mixing except where mechanical

application equipment is provided with effective strainers.

E. Tinting: Except where coating materials cannot be tinted, tint

each successive coat of paint a sufficiently contrasting color

to facilitate identification of complete coating coverage.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply coatings in accordance with coating

manufacturer's instructions and using application method best

suited for obtaining full, uniform coverage of surfaces to be

coated.

1. Employ only application equipment that is clean, properly

adjusted, in good working order, and of the type

recommended by the coating manufacturer.

2. Apply successive coats after adequate cure of the preceding

coat and within the recommended recoating time.

3. Apply each coat to achieve the dry film thickness per coat

recommended by the coating manufacturer. Application rates

in excess of those recommended and fewer numbers of coats

than specified will not be accepted.

4. Completed coatings shall be free of defects such as runs,

sags, variations in color, lap or brush marks, holidays,

and skips.




5. Apply coatings according to the schedule at the end of this

section and as otherwise indicated. Coat all similar

surfaces not specifically mentioned unless specifically

exempted.

a. Ensure that all surfaces receive a dry film thickness

equivalent to those of flat surfaces.

6. Coat front and back of miscellaneous items such as covers,

access panels, and grilles. Apply fully finish coats

behind movable items of furniture and equipment before

installation. Apply prime coat only behind non movable

items of furniture and equipment before installation.

7. Sand gloss coats before applying subsequent coatings.

B. Apply coatings to match approved mock ups.

C. Remove coatings not in compliance with this specification,

reclean and re prepare surfaces as specified, and apply

coatings to comply with the contract documents.

D. Scheduling: Apply first coat of material to properly prepared

surfaces without delay.

1. Apply successive coats within the time limits recommended

by the manufacturer.

E. Mechanical and Electrical Items: Paint mechanical and

electrical items exposed to view in finished spaces and in

equipment rooms.

1. Color code items in accordance with color schedules.

2. Color band and identify each component with flow arrows.

3. Paint exposed piping and supports, ducts and insulation,

conduit and fittings, panel enclosures, etc.

3.5 PRIME COATS

A. Field apply bottom coats scheduled except where the contract

documents require shop coating of ferrous metals.

B. Where first coat shows signs of suction spots or poorly sealed

areas, reapply first coat material to adequately seal surface

before proceeding with successive coats.

C. Apply block fillers using manufacturer's recommended

application techniques and achieving a pinhole free surface.




D. Ferrous metals that have not been shop primed shall be field

primed promptly after arrival at the site or shall be stored

away from the effects of weather.

E. Reprepare and retouch damaged prime coats using approved,

compatible primer.

3.6 FINISH COATS

A. Apply not less than the number of coats indicated.

B. Apply each coat to achieve not less than the dry film

thicknesses indicated per coat.

C. Apply additional coats at no additional cost to the Owner when

necessary to achieve complete hiding, uniform texture, or

uniform sheen and appearance.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Cleaning: Clean work area on a daily basis; dispose of spent

materials and empty containers. If requested, turn over to the

Architect all empty coatings containers used during the course

of each day.

1. Remove all trace of coatings from adjacent surfaces not

scheduled to be coated. Remove by appropriate methods that

do not damage surfaces.

B. Protection: Protect work against damage until fully cured.

Provide signs identifying wet surfaces until surfaces are

adequately cured.

1. Shortly before final completion of the project, examine

surfaces for damage to coatings and restore coatings to

new, undamaged condition.

2. Touch up of minor damage will be acceptable where result is

not visibly different from surrounding surfaces. Where

result is different either in color, sheen, or texture,

recoat entire surface.

3.8 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR INTERIOR SURFACES

A. Concrete Masonry Units (walls and partitions):

1. Latex, semi-gloss.




a. Bottom coat: Super Spec Latex Block Filler #M160.

b. Intermediate coat: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss

Finish N539.

c. Top coat: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss Finish

N539.

2. Acrylic epoxy, low gloss.

a. Bottom coat: Super Spec Latex Block Filler #M160.

b. Intermediate coat: Super Spec HP Acrylic Epoxy Semi-

Gloss Coating #P43/P43-84.

c. Top coat: Super Spec HP Acrylic Epoxy Semi-Gloss

Coating #P43/P43-84.

B. Ferrous Metal (hollow metal work, railings/handrails,

miscellaneous metal items, etc.): Alkyd, semi-gloss.

1. Bottom coat: Super Spec HP Alkyd Metal Primer #P06.

2. Intermediate coat: Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel

#C271.

3. Top coat: Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel #C271.

C. Gypsum Board (walls, partitions and ceilings):

1. Latex, flat.

a. Bottom coat: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer

#N534.

b. Intermediate coat: Aura Waterborne Interior Matte

Finish #522.

c. Top coat: Aura Waterborne Interior Matte Finish #522.

2. Latex, eggshell.


#N534.

b. Intermediate coat: Aura Waterborne Interior Eggshell

Finish #524.

c. Top coat: Aura Waterborne Interior Eggshell Finish

#524.

3. Latex, semi-gloss.


#N534.




b. Intermediate coat: Aura Waterborne Interior Satin

Finish #526.

c. Top coat: Aura Waterborne Interior Satin Finish #526.

4. Acrylic-epoxy, semi-gloss.

a. Bottom coat: Fresh Start All-Purpose 100% Acrylic

Primer #23.

b. Intermediate coat: Super Spec HP Acrylic Epoxy Semi-

Gloss Coating #P43/P43-84.

c. Top coat: Super Spec HP Acrylic Epoxy Semi-Gloss

oating #P43/P43-84.

D. Wood Surfaces (miscellaneous items): Latex, semi-gloss.

1. Bottom coat: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer #N534.

2. Intermediate coat: Aura Waterborne Interior Satin Finish

#526.

3. Top coat: Aura Waterborne Interior Satin Finish #526.

E. Insulated Pipe and Ducts: Latex emulsion, flat.

1. Bottom coat: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer #N534.

2. Top coat: Aura Waterborne Interior Matte Finish #522.

3.9 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR EXTERIOR SURFACES

A. Ferrous Metal (hollow metal work, miscellaneous metals, etc.):

Alkyd, semi-gloss.

1. Bottom coat: Super Spec HP Alkyd Metal Primer #P06.


#C271.


B. Galvanized Metal (railings/handrails, miscellaneous metals,

etc.): Alkyd, semi-gloss.

1. Bottom coat: Fresh Star All Purpose 100% Acrylic Primer

#023.


#C271.





ROOF DRAINS 221426-1

SECTION 221426 - ROOF DRAINS

1. PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1.RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Requirements, bidding

documents, Flexible Flashing and Sheet Metal and drawings.

1.2.GENERAL:

A. Existing drains will be re-worked, re-flashed, and deteriorated components replaced.

B. At start of each workday, drains within daily work area shall be plugged. Plugs to be removed at end of each

workday or before arrival of inclement weather

C. All drains will require new flashing lead.

D. New drains to be installed as directed by building owner's representative.

E. Roof Areas to be covered under this section: All roof areas.

2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1.DRAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Replacement parts should be from same manufacturer of original drain.

B. New drains, when required, should be appropriate for existing conditions. Drain manufacturers that may be used

but are not limited to the following subject to compliance

with requirements:

1 Zurn, Erie, PA

2 Smith, Montgomery, Alabama

3 Josam, Michigan City, Indiana

C. Metal flashing:

1 ASTM B29-79(1984), four lb. sheet lead or soft copper

drain flashing sheet.

D. Bitumen Stop: If bitumen stops are required (refer to detail drawing), see Flexible Flashing and Sheet Metal

Requirements.




3. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1.DRAINS

A. Existing drains

1 Remove flashing collar. Clean. If broken, replace.

2 Install tapered edge strip around drain to create 48 x

48 inch sump. Miter corners. Seal top of tapered edge

to drain rim with fiberglass mesh embedded between

alternate courses of asphalt mastic.

3 Install multi-ply roofing or stripping plies into sump

and onto drain rim.

4 Apply 1/16 inch uniformly thick layer of asphalt mastic

to surface receiving lead flashing.

5 Set single piece lead flashing (30” square minimum) in

mastic centered over drain, extend lead six inches

beyond drain rim. Neatly dress lead with wood block.

6 Prime lead with asphalt primer and allow to dry.

7 Install two plies fiberglass roof ply embedded in

alternate courses of specified membrane adhesive over

primed lead. Stripping plies shall extend two and four

inches beyond edge of lead.

8 Reclamp flashing collar to drain in bed of mastic. If

bolts are broken, drill and retap. If ladder clamps are

installed, replace missing clamps.

9 Neatly cut lead within drain at rim, remove.

10 Install strainer. 11 Install bitumen stop where coal tar floodcoat is to be

used.

B. New Drains:

1 Locate and install drain body in locations specified by

owner's representative.

2 Install tapered edge strip around drain to create 48 x

48 inch sump. Miter corners. Seal top of tapered edge

to drain rim with fiberglass mesh embedded between

alternate courses of asphalt mastic.

3 Install multi-ply roofing or stripping plies into sump

and onto drain rim

4 Apply 1/16 inch uniformly thick layer of asphalt mastic

to surface receiving lead flashing.

5 Set single piece lead flashing (30” square minimum) in

mastic centered over drain, extend lead six inches

beyond drain rim. Neatly dress lead with wood block.

6 Prime lead with asphalt primer.

7 Install two plies fiberglass roof ply embedded in

alternate courses of adhesive over primed lead.




Stripping plies shall extend two and four inches beyond

edge of lead.

8 Reclamp flashing collar to drain in bed of mastic. If

bolts are broken, drill and retap. If ladder clamps are

installed, replace clamps.

9 Neatly cut lead within drain at rim, remove.

10 Seal/plug drain to prevent water entry until service connection is completed.

C. Service Connection:

1 Locate new piping to include as few bends as possible.

Do not overload any existing pipe and drain, ensure

balanced disposal of all rain water. Make adequate

provisions for thermal movement of all piping.

2 Provide cleanouts at elbows under each drain, and at

tops and bottoms of each vertical run, at connection to

storm sewer, as called for by Plumbing Code, and as

required to make sure that drainage system can be

cleaned anywhere, if needed. Provide and install access

panels if required for service cleanouts.

3 Where new work joins old, provide all necessary

materials, repairs, changes, and associated work as

needed for proper connections.

4 Make all connections watertight.

5 Remove seal/plug and install strainer.

6 Use insulation on all pipes and fittings from drains to

existing down- pipes. Ensure full continuity of

insulation over pipes, fitting, and connections.

Provide concealed saddles at all hangers.

END OF SECTION 221426.13

FORCINA HALL - HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT THE COLLEGE … · 2018-07-25 · forcina hall - hvac and...

Documents

Transcript of FORCINA HALL - HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT THE COLLEGE … · 2018-07-25 · forcina hall - hvac and...